206GB

Vision Sensor

IV Series
Users Manual
(Monitor)

Read this manual before use.

After you read this manual, keep it in a safe place for future
reference.

Getting Started

Installation and
Connection

Basic Operation

Settings Navigator

(Setting the Judgment Condition)

Operating/Adjusting

Useful Features/
Various Functions

Controlling with
the Input/Output Line

Specifications

Status Table,
Troubleshooting

Introduction

Introduction
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.

Symbols
The following symbols alert you to important messages.
Be sure to read these messages carefully.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in minor or moderate injury.

It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in

product damage as well as property damage.

It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during

operation.

It indicates additional information on proper operation.

It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

It indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in separate manuals.

Cautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.
The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.
(2) 
(3) An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible.
If there are any mistakes or questions, please contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the
manual.
(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.
(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.
The company names and product names used in this manual are registered trademarks or the trademarks
of their respective companies.

Safety Information for IV Series

Safety Information for IV Series

General Precautions
yyDo not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body.
yyThis product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in
hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.

yyYou must verify that the IV Series are operating correctly in terms of functionality and performance
before the start and the operation of the IV Series.
yyWe recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage in the event of
a problem occurring.

yyKEYENCE never warrants the function or performance of the IV Series if it is used in manner that
differs from the IV Series specifications contained in this instruction manual or if the IV Series are
modified by yourself.
yyWhen the IV Series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance
may be degraded, depending on operating conditions and the surrounding environment.
yyDo not place the instruments, including peripherals, under the rapid temperature change. It may
cause condensation and may damage instruments or peripherals.
yyRemove the power cable from the power supply if you do not use this product for a long time.

Safety precautions on LED product

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein
may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Follow the instructions mentioned in this manual.
Otherwise, injury to the human body (eyes and skin) may result.
yyDo not stare into the direct or specularly reflected beam.
yyDo not disassemble this product. The laser radiation emission from this product is not
automatically stopped when it is disassembled.
yyDo not direct the beam at people or into areas where people might be present.
yyBe careful of the path of the LED beam. If there is a possibility that the operator may be exposed
to the specular or diffuse reflections, block the beam by installing a protective enclosure.
yyInstall this product so that the path of the LED beam is not as the same height as that of human eye.

206GB

Important Instructions

Important Instructions
Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction of the IV Series and to
ensure that it is used properly.

Precautions on use
yyThe power of this product and instruments connected to this product must be turned off when
the cable is to be installed or removed. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or a
product damage.
yyUse this product in the correct supply voltage. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.

yyFor instructions
yyDo not turn OFF the power while setting the items or saving the settings. Otherwise, all or
part of the setting data may be lost.
yyDo not let water, dust or oil stick to the camera/light of the sensor. Failure to do so may cause
a malfunction.
yyThe enclosure rating of the monitor (IV-M30) is IP40. This is not designed for water proof so be
careful to operate it.
yyWhen this product becomes dirty, do not rub it with a wet cloth, benzene, thinner, or alcohol.
Doing so may change the color or shape of the unit.
yyIf the unit is heavily contaminated, disconnect all the cables including the power supply cable,
wipe off the dirt with a cloth soaked with mild detergent, and then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
yyFor an LCD panel
yyDo not press the touch panel with the tip of your nail or anything that has a sharp tip such as
a pen or a screwdriver. Doing so may cause damage.
yyDo not apply shock to the touch panel or press it with excessive force. Doing so may cause
damage.
yyThe LCD panel may have some dots that are always lit (bright dots) or ones that are always
unlit (black dots). This phenomenon is not a problem.
yyDue to the unique characteristics of an LCD, displaying the same image for a long time may
cause an afterimage.
yyFor USB memory
yyUse products recommended by KEYENCE.
yyA USB memory device with a security function cannot be used.
yyUnplug the USB memory when turning on or off the power of IV Series.
yyDo not remove the USB memory while the USB is being written on. Otherwise, all or part of
the setting data may be lost or it may cause a damage.
yyFor external master image registration
When the external master image registration is used frequently, set [Write ROM when using Ext.
Master Save?] of the input option to [No] for nonvolatile memory protection of the internal
sensor. When the option is set to [Yes], the nonvolatile memory is guaranteed to write for
100,000 times.
yyFor automatic focus function
yyAutomatic focus function is used for adjusting the focusing position at the time of installation.
This will not activate during the operation.
yyFocusing position can be registered in each program. The program configurations are guaranteed
to switch for 100,000 times. If the focusing position does not need to change for each program,
set [Auto Focus Adj Pos] to [Common] for extending the life-span.
yyDo not apply shock or vibration during the focusing position adjustment. Failure to do so may
cause a product damage.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Important Instructions

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the IV Series in an abnormal condition
could cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
Contact our office for repair.
yyIf water or debris enters the IV Series.
yyIf the IV Series is dropped or the case is damaged.
yyIf abnormal smoke or odor emanates from the IV Series.

Precautions on installation
yyTo use this product correctly and safely, avoid installing it in the following locations. Failure to
do so may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
yyOutdoors
yyAltitude above 2000 m
yyLocations that are humid, dusty or poorly ventilated
yyLocations where the temperature is high such as those exposed to direct sunlight
yyLocations where there are flammable or corrosive gases
yyLocations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact
yyLocations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash onto the unit
yyTo improve the anti-noise feature, install the unit following the precautions below. Otherwise, a
malfunction may occur.
yyMount the sensor onto the insulated attached mounting adapter.
yyGround the FG cable (drain cable) of the sensor.
yyDo not mount the unit in a cabinet where high-voltage equipment is already installed.
yyMount the unit as far from power lines as possible.
yySeparate the unit as far as possible from the devices that emit strong electric or magnetic
field (such as solenoid or chopper).
yySeparate the I/O signal line from the power line or high-voltage line.
yyFor power supply
yyNoise superimposed on the power supply could cause malfunction. Use a stabilized DC
power supply configured with an isolation transformer.
yyWhen using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the frame ground
terminal.
yyDevices including this unit are precision components. Do not apply shock or vibration.
yyWhen connecting to a network, let engineers who are knowledgeable about networks handle it.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/IV-150M/IV-150MA/
IV-2000M/IV-2000MA
UL Certification
This product is a UL/C-UL Listed product.
yyUL File No. E301717
yyCategory NRKH, NRKH7
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a UL/C-UL Listed Product.
yyUse a power supply with Class 2 output defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code).
yyPower supply/ External input/ Control output shall be connected to a single Class 2 source only.
yyUse with an over current protection device which is rated 24 V or more and not more than 1A.
yyEnclosure Type 1 (Based on UL50)

CE Marking
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of
the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following
specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.

EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)

zz
yyApplicable Standard EMI: EN60947-5-2, Class A

EMS: EN60947-5-2
yyThe length of power I/O cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m.
Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated
complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely
responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.

Low-Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC)

zz
yyApplicable Standard: EN62471

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

For IV-M30
UL Certification
This product is a UL/C-UL Listed product.
yyUL File No. E207185
yyCategory NRAQ, NRAQ7
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a UL/C-UL Listed Product.
yyUse a power supply with Class 2 output defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code).
yyThis product is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1 enclosure.

CE Marking
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of
the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following
specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.

EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)

zz
yyApplicable Standard EMI: EN61326-1, Class A

EMS: EN61326-1
yyThe length of Monitor power cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m.
Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated
complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely
responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Version of the IV Series

Version of the IV Series

You can download the most recent operation software for the sensor (IV-150/500/2000) and the monitor
(IV-M30) from the KEYENCE web site.
Please refer to the description on the homepage for the introduction method.
URL : http://www.keyence.com/

Operation software of the sensor (IV-150/500/2000)

Version

Description

R1.00.00

The initial version.

R1.01.00

The processing time has been speeded up.

R1.10.00

The processing time and the response time to program switching input have been
speeded up.

R2.00.00

This is the version of this document.

The following functions have been added.
yyLogic output
yyTotal status NG output
yyRUN output
yyFTP client function
yyField network (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET)

Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30)

Version

Description

R1.00.00

The initial version.

R1.01.01

Compatibility with Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional).

R1.02.00

Compatibility with German.

R1.10.00

Compatibility with Tool Auto Tuning using a registration information file (*.ivt).

R2.00.00

This is the version of this document.

Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Structure of This Manual

Structure of This Manual

1

Getting Started

This chapter explains the system configuration and overview

of IV Series, package contents, and names and functions of
each part.

Installation and
Connection

This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and monitor,

and explains connection procedures.

Basic Operation

This chapter explains the basic operation and operation flow

of the IV Series.

Settings Navigator
(Setting the Judgment Condition)

Operating/Adjusting

Useful Features/
Various Functions

Controlling with
the Input/Output Line

Specifications

Appendices

This chapter explains how to set the sensors using

the Settings Navigator.

1
2
3
4
5

This chapter explains how to operate and adjust the IV Series.

This chapter explains the useful and detailed features.

This chapter explains how the input and output terminals

control each operation.

This chapter explains specifications and dimensions.

This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Contents

Contents
Introduction
Symbols
Cautions
Safety Information for IV Series..............................1
General Precautions............................................1
Safety precautions on LED product.....................1
Important Instructions..............................................2
Precautions on use..............................................2
Measures to be taken when an abnormality
occurs..................................................................3
Precautions on installation...................................3
Precautions on Regulations and Standards............4
For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/
IV-150M/IV-150MA/IV-2000M/IV-2000MA............4
UL Certification.................................................4
CE Marking.......................................................4
For IV-M30...........................................................5
UL Certification.................................................5
CE Marking.......................................................5
Version of the IV Series...........................................6
Operation software of the sensor
(IV-150/500/2000)................................................6
Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30).........6
Structure of This Manual.........................................7
Contents..................................................................8

Chapter 1 Getting Started

System Configuration...........................................1-2
Basic configurations of IV Series......................1-2
Connecting the monitor and single sensor....1-2
Connecting the monitor and
multiple sensors.............................................1-3
Overview of IV Series...........................................1-4
IV Series...........................................................1-4
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)....1-4
Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)...............1-5
Judgment processing flow................................1-6
Checking the Package Contents..........................1-8
Sensor...............................................................1-8
Optional parts for the sensor.............................1-8
Dome attachment..........................................1-8
Polarized visible light filter attachment..........1-8
Infrared polarization filter attachment............1-8
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire)....1-9
Mounting adapter...........................................1-9
Front cover (for replacement)........................1-9
Bracket..........................................................1-9
Intelligent Monitor............................................1-10
Optional parts for the monitor.........................1-10
Monitor power cable
(M8 4pin - strand wire).................................1-10
Protection sheet...........................................1-10
USB memory (1GB).....................................1-10
Stylus...........................................................1-10
Wall mounting adapter.................................1-11
Panel mounting adapter..............................1-11
DIN mounting adapter.................................1-11
Communication Cable.....................................1-12
Monitor cable (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)...........1-12
8

Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)..............1-12

Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-13
Sensor.............................................................1-13
Name and function of each part of

the sensor............................................1-13
Operation of the indicator light.............1-14

Monitor............................................................1-15

Chapter 2 Installation and Connection

Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2
Checking the view and installed distance.........2-2
Mounting the sensor.........................................2-4
Mounting the mounting adapter.....................2-4
Mounting on the wall..............................2-4

Mounting from the jig side......................2-4

Mounting the sensor onto the mounting

adapter..........................................................2-4
Unmounting the sensor.....................................2-5
Mounting the attachment..................................2-6
Using the dome attachment...........................2-6
Mounting the dome attachment.............2-6

Installed distance of the dome

attachment.............................................2-6
Using the polarizing filter attachment............2-7
Mounting the Monitor............................................2-8
Mounting to a wall.............................................2-8
Hanging on the hook.....................................2-8
Mounting with the wall mounting adapter......2-8
Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter....2-9
Mounting to a panel........................................2-10
Mounting to a panel.....................................2-10
Panel cutting dimension..............................2-10
Mounting to the DIN rail..................................2-11
Mounting using DIN mounting adapter........2-11
Unmounting from
the DIN mounting adapter...........................2-11
Cables................................................................2-12
Connecting the power I/O cable of
the sensor.......................................................2-12
Specification of I/O circuit and current of
the sensor.......................................................2-14
Input circuit..................................................2-14
No-voltage input

(When the NPN output is selected).....2-14

Voltage input

(When the PNP output is selected)......2-14

Output circuit...............................................2-14
When the NPN output is selected........2-14

When the PNP output is selected........2-14

Connecting the power cable of the monitor....2-15

Connecting the sensor and the monitor..........2-16
Connecting directly......................................2-16
Connecting via network...............................2-16
Connecting the monitor cable/
Ethernet cable.............................................2-17

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Contents

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2
Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4
Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5
Operation flow when the power is turned on.....3-5
Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(Direct Connection)...........................................3-6
Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(Network Connection).......................................3-7
Setting the network address of the monitor....3-7
Searching for a sensor to be connected........3-8
Specifying sensor to be connected by IP
address........................................................3-10
Operation for initial startup of the sensor........3-11
Setting to the Factory Default.............................3-12
Initializing the sensor......................................3-12
Initializing the monitor.....................................3-13
Basic Operation for the Monitor..........................3-14
Editing the value with the slider......................3-14
Editing the tool window...................................3-15
Inputting characters........................................3-16
Selecting the file in the USB memory.............3-17

Chapter 4 Settings Navigator

(Setting the Judgment Condition)
Settings Navigator................................................4-2
Flow in the Settings Navigator..........................4-2
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3
Starting the Settings Navigator.........................4-3
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow....4-4
Displaying the Settings Navigator guide...........4-5
Finishing the Settings Navigator.......................4-5
Finishing by completing all steps...................4-5
Finishing without completing the step............4-5
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)....4-6
Setting the Image Optimization.........................4-6
Main screen for the Image Optimization...........4-7
Setting the Trigger Options...............................4-8
Settings for the Trigger Options.....................4-8
Setting the Trigger Options..........................4-10
Auto Brightness Adjustment............................4-11
Focus Adjustment...........................................4-12
Focus adjustment for
the auto focusing type.................................4-12
Focus adjustment for
the manual focusing type.............................4-14
Extended functions for
the Image Optimization...................................4-16
Items of extended functions for
the Image Optimization................................4-16
Imaging Area...............................................4-17
Advanced Brightness Adjustment................4-18
Lighting........................................................4-18
Color Filters (color type only).......................4-19
Digital Zoom (monochrome type only).........4-19
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
as a Reference for Judgment)............................4-20
Main screen for the Master Registration.........4-20

Registering the master image.........................4-21

Extended functions for
the Master Registration...................................4-22
Items of extended functions for
the Master Registration...............................4-22
Master image registration from
the image history in the sensor....................4-22
Registering from the image in
the USB memory.........................................4-24
When using a batch backup file

(*.iva)...................................................4-24
When using an image capture file

(*.ivp)...................................................4-25
Brightness correction...................................4-26
3. Tool Settings 
(Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-28
Selecting a tool according to
its intended purpose........................................4-28
Types of tools..................................................4-28
Main screen for the Tool Settings....................4-30
Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool.........................4-31
Adding a tool................................................4-31
Editing a tool................................................4-31
Deleting a tool..............................................4-31
Outline tool......................................................4-32
Setting items for the Outline tool.................4-32
Setting the Outline tool................................4-33
Setting a search region........................4-35

Settings for disabling outlines..............4-35

Setting a sensitivity..............................4-36

Extended functions for the Outline tool........4-37

Rotation Range....................................4-38

Search Algorithm.................................4-38

Tool Name............................................4-39

Color Area/Area tool........................................4-40

Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool....4-40
Setting the Color Area/Area tool..................4-42
Mask settings.......................................4-45

Setting the upper limit..........................4-46

Extended functions of
the Color Area/Area tool..............................4-48
Advanced Color Extraction/

Advanced Brightness Extraction..........4-49

Tool Name............................................4-49

Fixed Reference Area..........................4-50

Position Adjustment tool..................................4-51

Setting items for
the Position Adjustment tool........................4-52
Setting the Position Adjustment tool............4-53
Setting a search region........................4-55

Settings for disabling outlines..............4-55

Setting a sensitivity..............................4-56

Extended functions for

the Position Adjustment tool........................4-57
Rotation Range....................................4-57

Extended functions for the Tool settings.........4-58

Items of extended functions for
the Tool settings...........................................4-58
Copy Tool.....................................................4-58

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Contents

4. Output Assignment 
(Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line).....4-60
Main screen for the Output Assignment..........4-60
Setting range of the Output Assignment.........4-60
Default value........................................4-60

Setting the Output Assignment.......................4-61

Extended functions for
the Output Assignment....................................4-62
Extended functions items for
the Output Assignment................................4-62
Logic Settings......................................4-63

Total Status Conditions........................4-65

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus....4-66

Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting
Starting an Operation...........................................5-2
Turning on the power and
starting an operation.........................................5-2
Exiting the sensor settings and
starting an operation.........................................5-2
Overview of the Operation Screen.......................5-3
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen....5-4
Menu Screen.....................................................5-4
Switching the display to the full-screen mode....5-5
Enlarging the image display..............................5-6
Selecting the tool whose information to be
displayed...........................................................5-6
Selecting the tool from

the pull-down menu...............................5-6

Selecting the tool by tapping it on

the monitor.............................................5-6
Selecting a display method for tools.................5-7
Display methods for tools..............................5-7
For color type.........................................5-7

For monochrome type............................5-8

Displaying the statistical information...............5-10

Displaying the statistical information...........5-10
Hiding the statistical information..................5-11
Displaying the histogram.................................5-12
Displaying the histogram.............................5-12
Hiding the histogram....................................5-13
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-14
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically
Adjusting the Judgment Condition)....................5-15
Using the images taken in

the Test mode......................................5-15

Using the image history saved in

the sensor............................................5-15
Using the image files saved in

the USB memory.................................5-15

Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..........5-16
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning.....5-16
Registering the OK/NG images to be used
for the Tool Auto Tuning..................................5-18
Registering the images taken in
the Test mode..............................................5-18
Registering the images from
the image history saved in the sensor.........5-20
10

Registering the images from

the file saved in the USB memory...............5-22
Confirming or deleting the images
registered for the Tool Auto Tuning.................5-25
Tool Auto Tuning by
the previous registration information...............5-26
Tool Auto Tuning by
the registration information file........................5-28
Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-32
Stabilizing the judgment process by
taking a clear image of the target....................5-32
Imaging the target widely.............................5-32
Adjusting the installed distance (WD)....5-32

Using the digital zooming function.......5-32

Correcting the distorted images due to

the installation..............................................5-33
Achieving adequate image brightness.........5-33
If the brightness cannot be adjusted

in the Auto Brightness Adjustment.......5-33

If the brightness cannot be adjusted

due to uneven brightness....................5-33

Achieving good focus..................................5-34
If good focus cannot be achieved by

the Auto Focus Adjustment..................5-34

Reducing the image blur..............................5-34
Reducing the shininess of the glossy or
metal surface...............................................5-35
Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment....5-35

Using the dome attachment.................5-35

Using the polarizing filter attachment....5-35

Installing the sensor at an angle..........5-35

Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)....5-36

Reducing the effect of
illumination variation....................................5-36
Stabilizing by correcting
the misaligned target position.........................5-36
Tool settings.........................................5-36

Processing during an operation...........5-36

Stabilizing the position adjustment..................5-37

Basic adjustments................................5-37

If the target tilts and the position

adjustment becomes unstable.............5-37

If the position adjustment becomes

unstable due to the effect of

the unwanted outlines..........................5-37
If the outline of the reference target

cannot be detected..............................5-38
Stabilizing the Outline tool..............................5-38
Basic adjustments................................5-38

If the outline cannot be detected

when the target becomes

out of position......................................5-38
If the detection becomes unstable

due to the effect of the unwanted

outline other than the target.................5-38
If the target tilts and the outline

cannot be detected..............................5-39
If the match rate difference

between the high and

low-quality-targets is small...................5-39

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Contents

If the outline of the target cannot

be detected..........................................5-39
Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool................5-39
Basic adjustments................................5-39

If the color you wish to judge cannot

be extracted.........................................5-39
If the area search becomes

unstable due to unwanted colors

being extracted....................................5-39
Shortening the Processing Time........................5-40
For the processing time..................................5-40
Flow of the internal process.................5-40

Shortening the imaging processing time.........5-41

Selecting the tool............................................5-41
Shortening the processing time of each tool...5-41
Shortening the processing time of
the Outline tool............................................5-41
Shortening the processing time of
the Color Area/Area tool..............................5-42
Shortening the processing time of
the position adjustment................................5-42

Chapter 6
Useful Features/Various Functions
List of the Useful Features...................................6-2
Useful features while running............................6-2
Useful features during installation/adjustment....6-4
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen..........6-7
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions).....6-8
Overview of the program functions...................6-8
Things can be performed with
the program functions.......................................6-8
Preparing the program functions.......................6-9
Preparation flow.............................................6-9
Preparation procedures.................................6-9
Using the program functions
(changing over)...............................................6-10
When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in
the Program Switch Method........................6-10
When the [External IN] is selected in
the Program Switch Method........................6-11
Editing a program name..................................6-12
Copying a program.........................................6-12
Initializing a program.......................................6-13
Sensor Image History (Confirming
the Images whose Status Result is NG).............6-14
Displaying the Sensor Image History screen....6-14
Displaying from the run screen............6-14

Displaying from

the Sensor Setup Menu screen...........6-14

Loading and confirming the saved images.....6-15
Clearing the saved images.............................6-16
Changing the logging conditions of
the image history.............................................6-17
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to
a USB Memory...................................................6-18
Installing/Removing the USB memory............6-18
Installing the USB memory..........................6-18
Removing the USB memory........................6-18

Displaying the USB Memory screen...............6-18

Displaying from the run screen............6-18

Displaying from

the Sensor Setup Menu screen...........6-18

Saving the sensor settings or
the image history.............................................6-19
Backing up in a batch..................................6-19
Saving the image history individually...........6-20
Transferring the settings backed up in
the USB memory to the sensor.......................6-21
Capturing the monitor screen and
saving to the USB memory.............................6-23
Enabling the screen capturing function.......6-23
Capturing the screen...................................6-23
Folder composition and file naming rules.......6-24
Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor....6-25
Sensor advanced settings...............................6-25
Environmental..............................................6-25
Setup Adjustment........................................6-25
Program.......................................................6-25
System.........................................................6-25
I/O Settings.....................................................6-26
Input Settings...............................................6-26
Output Settings............................................6-27
Polarity.........................................................6-28
I/O Monitor...................................................6-28
Device settings................................................6-29
Device Name...............................................6-29
Password Lock............................................6-30
Network Settings.............................................6-31
Advanced Network Settings............................6-32
FTP..............................................................6-32
FTP Destination Settings.....................6-33

Transfer Condition Settings.................6-34

Transfer Destination Folder Settings....6-35

Field Network...............................................6-37
Tilt Correction..................................................6-38
Rotate 180.....................................................6-40
White Balance (for color type only).................6-41
Program Switch Method..................................6-42
Auto Focus Adjustment Position
(auto focus type only)......................................6-42
Sensor Information..........................................6-43
Initializing the sensor......................................6-44
Updating the sensor........................................6-44
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information.........6-45
Monitor Settings..............................................6-45
Sensor Connect...........................................6-45
Monitor Device Settings...............................6-45
Monitor Environment...................................6-45
System.........................................................6-45
Sensor Connect..............................................6-46
When directly connecting with the sensor...6-46
When connecting with the sensor
via a network...............................................6-46
Network Settings.............................................6-48
Display Settings..............................................6-49
Touch Screen Lock.........................................6-50
Language........................................................6-51
Time................................................................6-51

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

11

Contents

Backlight.........................................................6-52
Touch Panel Calibration..................................6-52
Monitor Information.........................................6-53
Initialize Monitor..............................................6-53
Update Monitor...............................................6-53

Chapter 7
Controlling with Input/Output Line
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......7-2
External trigger..................................................7-2
Internal trigger...................................................7-3
Operating in the shortest cycle......................7-3
Importing the Status Output.................................7-4
Importing the total status /
total status NG output.......................................7-4
Importing the individual status output of
each detection tool / logic.................................7-5
Changing the timing of the status output..........7-6
Cancelling One-Shot output..........................7-6
Changing Over.....................................................7-7
Registering the Master Image..............................7-8
Clearing Errors...................................................7-10
Operations when Power of the Sensor is
Turned on...........................................................7-11
Input Response Time.........................................7-12
Response time for the switch program
input.............................................................7-12
Response time for the external master
registration input..........................................7-12
Response time for the error clear input.......7-12
Description for symbols...............................7-12

Chapter 8 Specifications
Specifications.......................................................8-2
Sensor...............................................................8-2
Intelligent Monitor..............................................8-4
Dimensions...........................................................8-6
Sensor...............................................................8-6
Optional parts for the sensor.............................8-7
Dome attachment..........................................8-7
Polarizing filter attachment............................8-8
Power I/O cable.............................................8-8
Mounting adapter...........................................8-8
Front cover....................................................8-8
Bracket..........................................................8-9
Intelligent Monitor............................................8-10
Optional parts for the monitor.........................8-12
Monitor power cable....................................8-12
Protection sheet...........................................8-12
Stylus...........................................................8-12
Wall mounting adapter.................................8-12
Panel mounting adapter..............................8-12
DIN mounting adapter.................................8-12
Connection Cable...........................................8-13
Monitor cable...............................................8-13
Ethernet cable.............................................8-13

12

Appendices
Status Table......................................................... A-2
Status table...................................................... A-2
Displaying and outputting the status result...... A-4
Displaying and outputting the status result
at the time of position adjustment.................... A-4
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and
Position Adjustment Tool..................................... A-5
Matching rate at the time of protrusion............ A-5
Cut-off process of the matching rate................ A-5
Settings List......................................................... A-6
RUN screen (menu display OFF)..................... A-6
RUN screen (menu display ON)...................... A-6
Sensor Setup Menu screen............................. A-7
Monitor Settings screen................................... A-9
Sensor Advanced screen............................... A-11
Sensor Setup screen..................................... A-14
1. Image Optimization................................. A-14
2. Master Registration................................ A-15
3. Tool Settings........................................... A-15
4. Output Assignment................................. A-18
Troubleshooting................................................. A-19
Error Messages................................................. A-22
Checking errors by observing
the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor.... A-22
Confirming error messages of the monitor..... A-24
Remedy when the Monitor cannot
be Connected with the Sensor.......................... A-28
Remedy when direct connection is
unavailable..................................................... A-28
Remedy when connection via
a network is unavailable................................. A-29
Confirming the status by observing
the indicator light of the sensor...................... A-32
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light......... A-32
STATUS indicator light................................ A-33
Confirming the status by observing
the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor..... A-34
Other methods of confirming a network
connection...................................................... A-35
Confirming the existence of
the sensor from the monitor........................ A-35
If the displayed confirmation

result is NG....................................... A-35

Confirming/Setting the IP address of
the monitor.................................................. A-36
Confirming/Setting the IP address of
the sensor................................................... A-37
Confirming the router settings.................... A-37
Remedy when data transfer via
FTP is unavailable...................................... A-38
Initializing the Network Settings 
(IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-40
Settings after initialization.............................. A-40
Connecting method after initialization............ A-40
For direct connection.......................... A-40

For network connection...................... A-40

Initializing the network settings...................... A-40

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Contents

Maintenance...................................................... A-41
Attaching the protection sheet....................... A-41
Replacing the front cover............................... A-41
Index.................................................................. A-42

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

13

Contents

MEMO

14

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1


System Configuration........................................1-2
Overview of IV Series.........................................1-4
Checking the Package Contents.......................1-8
Name and Function of Each Part....................1-13

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1-1

1
Getting Started

Getting Started

This chapter explains the system configurations

and overview of IV Series, how to check package
contents, and the name and function of each part.

System Configuration

System Configuration
1

Basic configurations of IV Series

Getting Started

Connecting the monitor and single sensor

IV Series
Simulator
(IV-Navigator)

Intelligent Monitor
IV-M30

IVP-Converter

Monitor power cable

(2m/5m/10m)

Monitor cable
(2m/5m/10m/20m)
Eth

ern

Sensor
IV-500C
IV-500CA
IV-500M
IV-500MA
IV-150M
IV-150MA
IV-2000M
IV-2000MA

et

co

mm

un

USB memory

ica

tio
n

Power I/O cable

(2m/5m/10m)
(Optional)
Dome attachment
IV-D10
Polarizing filter attachment
OP-87436/OP-87437
DC24V power

Photoelectric/
Indicator light/buzzer etc.
proximity sensor etc.
Alarm can be output by the
Sends the signal to the trigger
status output function.
input when the target is detected.

1-2

PLC
PLC can control the trigger input
and the status output function, and
can switch the program number.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

System Configuration

Connecting the monitor and multiple sensors

Ethernet switch

Ethernet cable
(2m/5m/10m)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1-3

Getting Started

When the network is connected, the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) can be connected by selecting a single
sensor from among multiple sensors.
* Each sensor requires the power I/O cable.
* IV-M30 requires the power cable.
* A single monitor cannot be connected with multiple sensors at the same time.

Overview of IV Series

Overview of IV Series
1

IV Series

Getting Started

The IV Series is an all-in-one Vision Sensor featuring a camera, a light, and a controller. This sensor
can be attached easily so complicated detection operations such as detecting the shapes of parts with a
photoelectric switch can be achieved easily.
Operation condition settings require the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the IV software IV-Navigator (IV-H1).
After setting is completed, the sensor can be operated independently.
The sensor with monitor and the sensor with PC are connected via an Ethernet so network connection with
multiple sensors besides direct single connection can be performed.

Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)

Direct connection
zz

Power I/O

Network connection
zz

Functions of monitor
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the
operation screen
yyMonitoring the
statistical information
yyReading the image
history

Functions of sensor
yyCamera
yyLight
yyImage detection
yyI/O
yySaving the image history

1-4

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Ethernet switch

Overview of IV Series

Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)

Getting Started

The IV-Navigator has the same functions as the intelligent monitor (IV-M30).
For details of operations using the IV-Navigator, refer to IV Series User's Manual (PC Software).

Direct connection
zz

Network connection
zz

Functions of IV-Navigator
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the operation
screen
yyMonitoring the statistical
information
yyReading the image history
yySimulator
Power I/O
Ethernet switch
Functions of sensor
yyCamera
yyLight
yyImage detection
yyI/O
yySaving the image history

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1-5

Overview of IV Series

Judgment processing flow

Getting Started

This section describes the basic judgment processing flow of this device.
Trigger input
BUSY output
Total status
output

Trigger input

Imaging

Tool processing

Status output

Save images

1-6

Inputs the imaging startup signal by synchronizing to the

target position from a photoelectric switch or PLC.
Also, the trigger can be input at a regular interval with an
internal trigger function.

Light up the built-in light and image the target by using the
CMOS image sensor. BUSY output function turns ON.

According to the settings of a detection tool, the image of the target

is scanned for detecting whether a target is high or low quality.
Up to 16 detection tools can be set. Also, misaligned
positions of the target can be corrected by using the
position adjustment tool.
After the detection process is completed, the BUSY output
function turns OFF.
Outputs the status results.
When the total status result is OK, the total status output
is ON.
When the total status result is NG, the total status NG
output is ON.

Saves the image to the image history memory in the sensor.

Conditions for saving the image can be selected from NG
only or All.
Color type can save 100 images, and monochrome type
can save 300 images.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Overview of IV Series

MEMO

1
Getting Started

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1-7

Checking the Package Contents

Checking the Package Contents

1
Getting Started

IV Series are constructed by each following model. Check that all the following packed items are packed
for each model you purchased before using.

Sensor
yyIV-500C
yyIV-500CA

yyIV-150M
yyIV-150MA

yyIV-500M
yyIV-500MA

yyIV-2000M
yyIV-2000MA

Waterproof cap for Ethernet connector x 1

Mounting adapter x 1
Screw for mounting
adapter x 1

Flathead screwdriver x 1
(Manual focus type only)

Sensor x 1
The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in the
default factory setting.

Instruction Manual x 1

Name and Function of Each Part (Page 1-13)

Mounting the Sensor (Page 2-2)
Cables (Page 2-12)

Optional parts for the sensor

Dome attachment
yyIV-D10

Instruction Manual x 1
Mounting screw x 2

Hexagon wrench
(L-shaped) x 1

Dome attachment x 1
Using the dome attachment (Page 2-6)

Polarized visible light filter attachment

Infrared polarization filter attachment

yyOP-87436

yyOP-87437
Mounting screw x 2

Mounting screw x 2

Instruction Manual x 1

Instruction Manual x 1

Polarized visible light

filter attachment x 1

Infrared polarization
filter attachment x 1

Using the polarizing filter attachment (Page 2-7)

Using the polarizing filter attachment (Page 2-7)

1-8

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Checking the Package Contents

Front cover (for replacement)

yyOP-87440 (2m)
yyOP-87441 (5m)
yyOP-87442 (10m)

yyOP-87461

1
Getting Started

Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire)

Mounting screw x 2

Front cover (for

replacement) x 1

O-shaped ring
(Small x 2, Large x 1)

Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire) x 1

Mounting adapter

Hexagon wrench (L-shaped) x 1

yyOP-87460

Instruction Manual x 1
Screw for the mounting
adapter x 1

Mounting adapter x 1
Same as accessories for the sensor.
Optional parts in case of loss/damage.

Optional parts for replacement.

Replacing the front cover (Page A-41)

Bracket
yyOP-87685

Bracket A x 1

Screw for the bracket and

nut x 1
Mounting screw x 4

Bracket B x 1

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1-9

Checking the Package Contents

Intelligent Monitor

Getting Started

yyIV-M30

Stylus x 1
String for hanging the stylus x 1
Monitor x 1

Wall mounting adapter x 1

Screw for the adapter x 2
Hexagon nut x 2
Instruction Manual x 1
Starting Guide x 1

Name and Function of Each Part (Page 1-13)

Mounting the Monitor (Page 2-8)
Cables (Page 2-12)

Optional parts for the monitor

Monitor power cable
(M8 4pin - strand wire)

USB memory (1GB)

yyOP-87502

yyOP-87443 (2m)
yyOP-87444 (5m)
yyOP-87445 (10m)

USB memory x 1

Stylus
yyOP-87462

Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire)

String for hanging the

stylus x 1

Protection sheet
yyOP-87463

Stylus x 1
Same as accessories for monitors.
Optional parts in case of loss/damage.

Protection sheet x 1
Attaching the protection sheet (Page A-41)

1-10

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Checking the Package Contents

Wall mounting adapter

Getting Started

yyOP-87464

Screw for the adapter x 2

Hexagon nut x 2
Wall mounting adapter x 1
Same as accessories for monitors.
Optional parts in case of loss/damage.

Panel mounting adapter

yyOP-87465

Mounting screw (lateral) x 2

Mounting screw (front) x 4

Panel mounting
adapter x 1
Mounting to a panel (Page 2-10)

DIN mounting adapter

yyOP-87466
Mounting screw (lateral) x 2

DIN mounting
adapter x 1
Mounting to the DIN rail (Page 2-11)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1-11

Checking the Package Contents

Communication Cable

Getting Started

Monitor cable (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)

Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)

yyOP-87450 (2m)
yyOP-87451 (5m)
yyOP-87452 (10m)
yyOP-87453 (20m)

yyOP-87457 (2m)
yyOP-87458 (5m)
yyOP-87459 (10m)

Monitor cable (M12 4pin - M12 4pin) x 1

1-12

Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Name and Function of Each Part

Name and Function of Each Part

Sensor
sensor

1
2
3
4

2 Connector for power I/O cable

Connector for connecting the power I/O cable.
Use this for supplying the power to the sensor
and for connecting with external devices.
Cables (Page 2-12)
3 Focusing position adjustment screw
(manual focus type only)
Adjusts the focus of the displayed image.
Focus Adjustment (Page 4-12)
4 Connector for monitor cable/Ethernet cable
Connector for connecting a monitor cable or
Ethernet cable. Use this for connecting the
monitor, PC, or Ethernet switch.
Cables (Page 2-12)

7
8

When the cable is not connected, attach

the waterproof cap for Ethernet connector
to maintain enclosure rating.
Tightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 Nm
5 Indicator light
Indicates the operating status of the sensor.
Operation of the indicator light (Page 1-14)
6 Built-in light
LED light that illuminates the target
7 Camera
Images the object.
8 Front cover
Protects the camera and built-in lights.
The front cover is protected by the protection
sheet (blue) in the default factory setting. Remove
the sheet when the sensor is to be used.
Front cover for replacement is provided for
maintenance.
Replacing the front cover (Page A-41)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1-13

1
Getting Started

Name and function of each part of the

1 Mounting adapter
Use this for mounting and fixing the sensor.
Mounting the Sensor (Page 2-2)

Name and Function of Each Part

Operation of the indicator light

Getting Started

Details on operations of the indicator light are

shown below.
4

1 2 3
1 PWR/ERR
Indicates the power supplying status to the
sensor and the error status of the sensor.
yyGreen (ON).......Operating.
yyGreen (Blink).....Setting processing. Operation
is stopped. Blinks once a
second.
yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error has
occurred.
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error has
occurred.
yy(OFF)................Power is not supplied.
Adjusting the focusing position
(manual focus only).
For countermeasures when an error occurred,
refer to
Error Messages (Page A-22).
2 OUT
Indicates the comprehensive result.
yyGreen................Comprehensive result is OK.
yyRed...................Comprehensive result is NG.
yy(OFF)................Setting processing.
Standby status until the first
judge finishes after starting the
operation or after switching
the program number.
yyOrange (Blink)...Indicates the focusing status
while adjusting the focusing
position with the blinking speed
(manual focus type only).

Focus adjustment for
the manual focusing type
(Page 4-14)
1-14

3 TRIG
Green light lights up (one-shot) according to
input of the internal or external trigger.
4 STATUS
Indicates the connection status within the monitor.
yyGreen (ON).......Normally connected with
monitor.
yyGreen (Blink).....IP address has been retrieved
but the sensor is not correctly
connected with monitor.
yy(OFF)................IP address is not assigned.
Sensor is not correctly
connected with monitor.
yyOrange (Blink)...Indicates the focusing status
while adjusting the focusing
position with the blinking speed
(manual focus type only).

Focus adjustment for the
manual focusing type (Page 4-14)
When the sensor cannot correctly connect with
the monitor, refer to
Remedy when the
Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor
(Page A-28).
5 LINK/ACT
Indicates the linking status within monitor or
Ethernet switch.
yyGreen (ON).......Normally linked.
yyGreen (Blink).....Normally linked, and the data
is sending/receiving.
yy(OFF)................Sensor is not normally linked.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Name and Function of Each Part

Monitor

4
5
6
7

8
1

10

1 Power connector
Connects the monitor power cable.
Cables (Page 2-12)
2 Connector for the monitor cable/Ethernet
cable
Connector for connecting the monitor cable or
Ethernet cable. Used when connecting with the
sensor or Ethernet switch.
Cables (Page 2-12)
3 Unlock button
Push this button when dismounting the monitor from
the wall mounting adapter or DIN mounting adapter.
Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter
(Page 2-9)
Unmounting from the DIN mounting adapter
(Page 2-11)

For countermeasures when an error occurred,

Error Messages (Page A-22).
refer to
5 Indicator light (SENSOR)
Indicates the connecting status to the sensor.
yyGreen (ON).......Connected normally to the
sensor.
....Linked normally but it is not
yyGreen
(Slowly blinks) properly connected to the
sensor.
yy(OFF)................It is not properly connected
because it did not link
normally.
If the monitor cannot correctly connect with the
Remedy when the Monitor
sensor, refer to
cannot be Connected with the Sensor (Page A-28).
6 LCD monitor/Stylus
Displays the operation screen and setup screen.
Operates by touching the screen with the stylus.
7 USB connecting connector
Connector for connecting the USB memory.
Connector is protected by the cover.
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a
USB Memory (Page 6-18)
8 Stylus
Used to operate the touch-screen.
9 Stylus holder
Stores the stylus.
10 Strap holder
Holds the strap or hangs the stylus.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1-15

1
Getting Started

4 Indicator light (PWR)

Indicates the operating status of the monitor.
yyGreen (ON).......The power is turned ON.
yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error occurred
to the sensor or monitor.
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error occurred to
the sensor or monitor.
(OFF)................
y
The power is turned OFF.
y

Name and Function of Each Part

MEMO

1
Getting Started
1-16

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

2


Mounting the Sensor..........................................2-2

Mounting the Monitor.........................................2-8
Cables................................................................2-12

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

2-1

2
Installation and Connection

Installation and
Connection

This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and

monitor, and explains connection procedures.

Mounting the Sensor

Mounting the Sensor

2
Installation and Connection

yyGround (functional ground) the drain cable

(FG) of the power I/O cable.
yyMount and insulate the sensor. Use the
attached mounting adapter to insulate.
Sensor case has been grounded. If the sensor
is not insulated, the electric potential and
noises may cause a damage or malfunction.
yyDo not place the sensor in the environment
that exceeds the limit of sensor's resistance
to the environment, or environment that
propagates the vibration directly to the
sensor. Those may cause a damage or
malfunction.

Checking the view and installed

distance
For IV Series, installed distance between the view
and object is different depending on the type of the
sensor. Check the type of the sensor to be used
and its view, and place it in the proper distance.
View H

yyManual focus type needs to adjust the focusing

position after installed. Reserve the enough
space to adjust and install it.
yyAt the time of installation, it is better to enable
the position or direction adjustment of the
sensor by installing the adjustment system at
the sensor mounting area.
yyView and optical axis have individual differences.
Adjust the position by checking the actual image
at the time of installation.
yyPlace the sensor where no ambient light has
effect. Ambient light includes solar light, lights of
other devices, and photoelectric sensors. Also,
be careful when the light intensity of the ambient
light changes. Use the shield to protect when the
location cannot be changed.
yyPlace the sensor where no object can block out
the internal light or the view of the sensor.
yyDetection may become unstable due to the
lights if multiple sensors are placed nearby each
other. Delay the timing of external trigger or use
the shield to avoid interference.

2-2

View V

Indicator light

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Installed distance
WD
View V = View H x 0.75
(H : V = 4 : 3)

The indicator light of

the sensor side is the
front surface of an
image.

Mounting the Sensor

Standard range type (color/monochrome)

zz

500

Installation and Connection

Installed distance WD (mm)

600

400
300
200
150
100
50
0

25

50 70

100 130 150

200
210

250

View H (mm)

Installed distance WD (mm)

Short range type

zz
150

100

50

10 12

20

30

36

40

View H (mm)

Long range type

zz
Installed distance WD (mm)

2500
2000
1500
1000
500
300
0

45

100

200

300

400

View H (mm)

The value of View H and V will be a half of the

value on the figures above when using the digital
zooming function (monochrome type only).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

2-3

Mounting the Sensor

Mounting the sensor

Mounting the sensor onto the mounting

adapter

Mounting the mounting adapter

Installation and Connection

Use the mounting adapter (accessory or OP-87460)

to mount the sensor.
The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors
in the default factory setting. Remove it from the
sensor.
Unmounting the sensor (Page 2-5)

Mounting on the wall

yyScrew : M3 x 4
Use the commercially available screws which
have head thickness of 3 mm or lower.
yyTightening torque : 1.0 Nm or lower

Mounting from the jig side

yyScrew : M4 x 4
Use the commercially available screws.
yyTightening torque : 1.5 Nm or lower

1 Mount the sensor to the left and right

stopper on the mounting adapter.

Sensors cannot be mounted on the side with the

indicator light.
Indicator light

Push the sensor to the

stopper of the fixing screw

Push until you hear the clicking sound from

the both side stoppers

2 Fix the mounting adapter and sensor

using the attached screws.

yyScrew : M3 x 1
Use the attached screws.
yyTightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 Nm

For details on mounting hole dimensions, refer to

Dimensions (Page 8-6).
Remove the
protection sheet

2-4

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Mounting the Sensor

Unmounting the sensor

1 Dismount the screw.

Installation and Connection

2 Pull out the stopper of the mounting

adapter and unmount the sensor.

Pull out the

stopper

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

2-5

Mounting the Sensor

2 Fix the dome attachment with attached

Mounting the attachment

Using the dome attachment

yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor.

yyUse the dome attachment at a correct
installation distance. Failure to do so may lose
the effect of the dome attachment.
yyAdjust the brightness with the dome attachment
mounted.
Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with
the dome attachment mounted.
White Balance (for color type only) (Page 6-41)

Mounting the dome attachment

1 Mount the attachment by aligning the

concave part of the dome attachment with

the mounting screw of the front cover of
the sensor.

Front cover
mounting screw

Concave part

2-6

Screw hole for

mounting the
attachment

Installed distance of the dome

attachment

62 to 112 mm from the front face of the sensor

(0 to 50 mm from the front face of the dome attachment)
Sensor type
yyStandard range type
yyShort range type
Installed distance
from the front face
of the sensor

Concave part

62 to 112 mm

Installation and Connection

Dome attachment can be used for the standard

range type and short range type sensor.

yyScrew : Dedicated screw x 2

Use the attached dedicated screws.
yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 Nm

(0 to 50 mm)

dedicated screws.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Target

Mounting the Sensor

Using the polarizing filter attachment

the attached dedicated screws.

yyScrew : M2.5 x 2
Use the attached dedicated screws.
yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 Nm

Remove the protection

sheet (blue)

1 Mount the attachment by aligning the

concave part of the polarizing filter

attachment with the mounting screw of
the front cover of the sensor.

Front cover
mounting screw

Screw hole for

mounting the
attachment
Concave part

Concave part

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

2-7

Installation and Connection

yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor.

yyThere are the polarized visible light filter
attachment (OP-87436) and the infrared
polarization filter attachment (OP-87437). Use
the correct polarization filter attachment in
accordance with the illuminant of the sensor light.
Failure to do so may lose the effect.
yyAdjust the brightness with the polarization filter
attachment mounted.
Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with
the polarization filter attachment mounted.
White Balance (for color type only) (Page 6-41)

2 Fix the polarizing filter attachment with

Mounting the Monitor

Mounting the Monitor

Mounting to a wall

2
Installation and Connection

Use the wall mounting adapter (accessories or OP87464).

Hang it on the hook with the wall mounting adapter
mounted to the monitor, or mount the monitor to the
wall mounting adapter mounted on the wall.

Hanging on the hook

For operation take the monitor from the hook and
operate it while holding it in your hands.

1 Mount the monitor to the wall mounting

adapter by aligning the stopper of the wall

mounting adapter to the groove on the
rear monitor.

Mounting with the wall mounting

adapter
The monitor can be operated by the following
methods.
yyUnhang to pick up the monitor from the hook and
operate it.
yyOperate it while mounted on the wall.

1 Mount the wall mounting adapter to the wall.

Mounting by creating a screw hole in the wall

zz
yyScrew : M3 x 2
Use commercially available screws.
yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 Nm

Slide the monitor down all the way, and confirm

that the monitor is locked.

Mounting by creating a plated through

zz
hole on the panel

yyScrew : M3 x 2, Nut : M3 x 2
Use the attached screws and nuts.
yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 Nm
Stopper

2 Hang the monitor on the hook.

2-8

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Mounting the Monitor

2 Mount the monitor to the wall mounting

adapter by aligning the stopper of the wall

mounting adapter to the groove on the
rear monitor.

Unlock the monitor from the wall mounting adapter

by pulling toward the unlock button. And slide up to
unmount the monitor mounted to the adapter.

Unlock

Stopper

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

2-9

2
Installation and Connection

Slide the monitor down all the way, and confirm

that the monitor is locked.

Unmounting from the wall mounting

adapter

Mounting the Monitor

3 Mount the monitor with the panel adapter

Mounting to a panel

mounted to the control board from the

rear side, and fix it with the screws.

Mounting to a panel

1 Connect the power cable and monitor

cable to the monitor.

Cables (Page 2-12)

2 Mount the panel adapter to the monitor

and fix it with the attached screws.

Strap holder

yyScrew : M3, 11 mm long, with 2 washers

Use the attached screws.
yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 Nm

Stylus can be hung from the strap holder using

the hanging string (accessory).

Panel cutting dimension

(Panel cutting square hole dimension)

100

110
(Circular hole position for screw)

2-10

4-3.5

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

(Circular hole position for screw)

111 +1
-0

92 +1
-0

Installation and Connection

yyMountable board thickness : 1 to 4 mm

yyScrew : M3, 7 mm long, with 4 washers
Use the attached screws.
yyTightening torque : 0.5 Nm or lower

(Panel cutting square hole dimension)

Operate the monitor by mounting it to the panel

side such as a control board.
Mount the panel adapter (OP-87465) to the monitor,
and mount it to the panel.

Mounting the Monitor

2 Adjust the position of the DIN mounting

Mounting to the DIN rail

adapter and the DIN rail by pulling down

the stopper of the adapter, and then push
up the stopper to lock it.

Mounting using DIN mounting adapter

1 Mount the monitor to the DIN mounting

adapter.

Slide the monitor until the end of the stopper,

and confirm that the monitor is locked.

Stopper

Unmounting from the DIN mounting

adapter
Unlock the monitor from the DIN mounting adapter
by pulling toward the unlock button. And slide up to
unmount the monitor mounted to the adapter.

Unlock

Stopper

Fixing to the DIN mounting adapter

zz
To fix the monitor to the DIN mounting adapter,
use the attached screws.
yyScrew : M3 x 2
Use the attached flat head screw.
yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 Nm

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

2
Installation and Connection

Mount the DIN mounting adapter (OP-87466) to the

monitor, and mount it to the DIN rail.
The monitor can be operated by the following methods.
yyPick up the monitor from the DIN mounting
adapter and operate it.
yyOperate it while mounted on the DIN rail.

2-11

Cables

Cables

Connecting the power I/O cable of

the sensor

Installation and Connection

1 Adjust the pins of the connector for the

power I/O cable and pin connection of the

cable connector, and connect the cable to
the sensor.

3 Wire each cable according to its intended

purpose.

Selecting NPN output

zz
When NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-11)
External device
Brown (DC24V)
Black/White/
Gray/Orange
(OUT)
Pink/Yellow/
Light Blue/Purple/
Green/Red
(IN)

Adjust the pins and the

pin connection

Load
IN
DC24V
OUT
(NPN)

Blue (0V)
Drain wire (FG)

2 Tighten the connector by turning the screwon connector in the clockwise direction.

Tightening torque of the screws needs to be 1.0

to 1.5 Nm.

yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) /

Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4)
yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) /
Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
Use it by assigning the optional function
to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.

Selecting PNP output

zz

When PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-11)

Brown (DC24V)
Pink/Yellow/
Light Blue/Purple/
Green/Red
(IN)
Black/White/
Gray/Orange
(OUT)
Blue (0V)

When connecting the connector, insert it

without tipping and tighten it well. If the
tightening is weak, vibration can loosen
the connector and cause bad connections.
Also, the enclosure rating may not be
maintained with loose connection.
* Indication is retighten approximately
90 to 120 with tools such as pliers
after tightening with hands.

2-12

External device

(PNP)
OUT
DC24V
IN
Load

Drain wire (FG)

yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) /

Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4)
yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) /
Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
Use it by assigning the optional function
to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Cables

Wiring
color

Name

Assigning
default value

Brown

DC24V

+ side of power

Blue

0V

- side of power
GND of input-output cable

Black

OUT1

Total Status (N.O.)

White

OUT2

BUSY (N.O.)

Gray

OUT3

Error (N.O.)

Orange

OUT4

OFF

Pink

IN1

External trigger

Yellow

IN2

OFF

Light Blue

IN3

OFF

Purple

IN4

OFF

Green

IN5

OFF

Red

IN6

OFF

Drain

FG

Description

2
Installation and Connection

Output assignable function

yyTotal Status
yyTot. StatusNG
yyRUN
yyBUSY
yyError
yyPos. Adj.
yyJudge result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 16)
yyLogical operation result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 4)
yyOFF (not used)
Set external trigger.
Rising timing () or falling timing () can be set.
Input assignable function
yyProgram bit0 to bit4
yyClear Error
yyExt. Master Save
yyOFF (not used)
Insulated frame

Cable specification yyBrown/Blue/Black/White/Gray/Orange : AWG25

yyPink/Yellow/Light Blue/Purple/Green/Red : AWG28
yyWith braided shield cable (with drain cable)
yyThe output cable assignment can be changed.
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)
yyN.O./N.C. can be changed.
Output Settings (Page 6-27)
yyThe input cable assignment can be changed.
Input Settings (Page 6-26)

yyIndividually insulate the non-used input-output cables.

yyFor input cables of this sensor, connect with non-contact output (transistor output/SSR output).
For contact output (relay output), incorrect input may be operated due to the contact bouncing.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

2-13

Cables

Specification of I/O circuit and

current of the sensor

No-voltage input (When the NPN

output is selected)

+3.3V

Brown

DC24V

Brown

Main circuit

0V

Blue
* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6

Voltage input (When the PNP output is

selected)

When the PNP output is selected

When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page

3-11), the circuit becomes open collector PNP output
circuit.
yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA
yyRemaining voltage : 2 V or lower
DC24V

Brown

Main circuit

0V

Blue

IN1 - IN6

0V

* Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) /

Orange (OUT4)
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1
to OUT4

Blue
* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6

2-14

OUT1 - OUT4

Load

Brown

* Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) /

Orange (OUT4)
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1
to OUT4

Overcurrent protection circuit

DC24V

Blue

Main circuit

When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page

3-11), the circuit becomes voltage input circuit.
yyInput maximum rating : 26.4 V
: 15 V or higher
yyON voltage
: 2 mA (for 24V)
yyON current
: 0.2 mA or lower
yyOFF current

OUT1 - OUT4

0V

IN1 - IN6

Load

DC24V

When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page

3-11), the circuit becomes open collector NPN output
circuit.
yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA
yyRemaining voltage : 1.5 V or lower

Overcurrent protection circuit

When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page

3-11), the circuit becomes no-voltage input circuit.
External power supply is not necessary.
: 2 V or lower
yyON voltage
: 0.1 mA or lower
yyOFF current
: 2 mA (short circuit)
yyON current

When the NPN output is selected

Main circuit

Installation and Connection

Input circuit

Output circuit

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Cables

Connecting the power cable of

the monitor

Align the arrow mark of the power cable

and the direction of the front monitor, and
connect the cable to the monitor.

Installation and Connection

3 Wire to the power supply.

Brown (DC24V)
Monitor power cable
(2m/5m/10m)

Blue (0V)

DC24V

Cable specification Brown/Blue : AWG24

Arrow mark

2 Turn the screw-on connector in the

clockwise direction to tighten it.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

2-15

Cables

Connecting the sensor and the

monitor

Installation and Connection

Connecting directly
Connect the sensor and monitor using the monitor
cable.

Connecting via network

Connect each Ethernet cable to the monitor and
sensor.
Connect the other side of the Ethernet cable to the
Ethernet switch.

Ethernet switch

Monitor cable
(2m/5m/10m/20m)

Ethernet cable
(2m/5m/10m)

For details on connecting the monitor cable, refer to

Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable
(Page 2-17).

For details on connecting the Ethernet cable, refer

to
Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable
(Page 2-17).

The sensor and monitor do not support PoE

(Power over Ethernet). Supply power using
the power cable.

2-16

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Cables

Connecting the monitor cable/

Ethernet cable

1 Align the pin connection parts of the

monitor cable/Ethernet cable connector

with three pins of the cable connector,
and connect the cable to the sensor.

Align the pins and

the pin connection

If the connector cable tightening is weak,

vibration may loosen the connector and cause
bad connections or cable disconnections.
Also, the enclosure rating may not be
maintained with loose connection.
Properly follow the procedures above and
tighten the connector completely.
Check the spaces between the monitor cable/
Ethernet cable and the cable connector.

For sensors
zz
* Same procedures for monitors.

Spaces between
connectors

2 Tighten the connector by turning the

For monitors
zz

screw-on connector in the clockwise

direction. When connecting the connector,
insert it without inclination while pushing
in and tighten it well.
(2)
When the screw stops rotating by the
locking mechanism, further tighten it
while pushing.
(1)
Tighten the screw-on connector

Spaces between
connectors

* Same procedures for monitors.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

2-17

2
Installation and Connection

This section describes the details on connecting the

monitor cable/Ethernet cable using the example of
connecting the monitor cable to the sensor.

Repeat the steps (1) and (2) and when you cannot
tighten the screw by hand any more, use a tool
such as pliers for further tightening. Tightening
torque, retorque degree, and acceptable spaces
between connectors are shown below.
yyMonitor cable/Ethernet cable
(OP-87450/OP-87451/OP-87452/OP-87453/
OP-87457/OP-87458/OP-87459)
Tightening torque : 0.8 to 1.0 Nm
Retightening degree : 5 to 10
Spaces between connectors (reference value)
For sensors : 0 mm
For monitors : 2.2 mm

Cables

MEMO

2
Installation and Connection
2-18

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

3


Basic Operation

Overview of Screen and Operation...................3-2

Basic Operation Flow.........................................3-4
Operation when the Power is Turned on..........3-5
Setting to the Factory Default.........................3-12
Basic Operation for the Monitor......................3-14

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

3-1

3
Basic Operation

This chapter explains the contents of the monitor

display and operation of the IV Series, basic
operation flow, and operation when turning on the
power for the first time.
It also explains procedures to restore the sensor
and monitor to the default factory settings and basic
operation of monitor.

Overview of Screen and Operation

Overview of Screen and Operation

This section explains monitor displays and operation.
For details of what can be set on each screen and its operation, see to the applicable references.
Run screen

3
Basic Operation

Images and judges based on

the judgment condition.
Starting an Operation
(Page 5-2)

Full-screen display/Zooming
Use the [Zoom] button to
enlarge the view of the monitor
Switching the display
to the full-screen mode
(Page 5-5)
Enlarging the image
display (Page 5-6)

Switching ON/OFF of
the menu display

Tool display
Select the display patterns
of tools from OFF / Window /
Process 1 / Process 2
Selecting a display method
for tools (Page 5-7)

Statistics display

Monitor Settings
Sets each function of the monitor.
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information
(Page 6-45)

Displays statistical information

of status on the monitor.
Displaying the statistical
information (Page 5-10)

Histogram display
Displays histogram of status
on the monitor.
Displaying the
histogram (Page 5-12)

3-2

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Overview of Screen and Operation

Program list

Sets condition to judge a target.

Displaying the Sensor Setup
Menu Screen (Page 6-7)

Settings Navigator
Sets the program to be used
for judgment.

Chapter 4 Settings Navigator
(Setting the Judgment Condition)
(Page 4-1)

B
Limit Adjustment
Adjusts the judgment threshold.
Adjusting Thresholds for
Judgment (Page 5-14)

Sensor Advanced
Performs the sensor advanced settings.
Setting the Extended Functions of
the Sensor (Page 6-25)

Tool Auto Tuning

Automatically adjusts threshold of
tool and extraction conditions of
Color Area/Area tool in accordance
with OK/NG image.
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically
Adjusting the Judgment
Condition) (Page 5-15)

Sensor Image History

Operates the sensor image history.

Sensor Image History (Confirming the
Images whose Status Result is NG)
(Page 6-14)

USB Memory

Sets the operation when using USB memory.

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
to a USB Memory (Page 6-18)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

3-3

3
Basic Operation

Checks or initializes
the program.
Things can be performed
with the program functions
(Page 6-8)

Sensor Setup Menu

Basic Operation Flow

Basic Operation Flow

Mounting, connecting, and wiring the sensor and monitor
Mount the sensor and monitor, and then connect and wire the cable.
Chapter 2 Installation and Connection (Page 2-1)

3
Basic Operation

Turning on the power

Turn on the power of the sensor and monitor, and then perform the initial startup setting.
Operation when the Power is Turned on (Page 3-5)

Settings Navigator
Create the program to be used for operation in [Settings Navigator] (Sensor Setup).

STEP 1: Setting of image optimization

Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for
defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target.
Set the trigger option, and adjust the brightness and imaging focus.
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target) (Page 4-6)

STEP 2: Registration of a master image

Image the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the
reference of judgment.
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)
(Page 4-20)

STEP 3: Tool setting

Set the tool to judge a target.
Set the tool onto the master image and set the threshold for judgment. Up to 16
detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set.
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-28)

STEP 4: Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line (OUT1 to OUT4).
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)

Starting the operation/adjustment

Switch the settings screen to the run screen, and start the operation. If the setting is
inappropriate, adjust the thresholds and tool settings (Tool Auto Tuning).
Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting (Page 5-1)

3-4

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Operation when the Power is Turned on

Operation when the Power is Turned on

Operation flow when the power is
turned on
Turn on the power

Initial start-up of the

monitor
yyDirect Connection
yyNetwork Connection

(2)

(4)

(5)

The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. Set the

(3) 
activation condition in Settings Navigator. After the
setting is completed, operation begins.

Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1)

Initial start-up of
the sensor
(3)

Sensor settings menu

(2) When the power of the sensor is turned on for

the first time, set the polarity.
Operation for initial startup of the sensor

(Page 3-11)

Run

Connecting...

(4) After the second time of starting the monitor

and sensor, the operation begins when the
power is turned on.
Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting (Page 5-1)

(5) When the connection is failed, the process
remains in the connecting screen.
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be

Connected with the Sensor (Page A-28)
The sensor can be independently operated.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

3-5

3
Basic Operation

(1)

(1) When the power of the monitor is turned on for

the first time, set the display language, date and
time, and the connection method with the sensor.
For the connection method with the sensor, there
are Direct Connection and Network Connection.

Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(Direct Connection) (Page 3-6)

Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(Network Connection) (Page 3-7)

Operation when the Power is Turned on

Operation for initial startup of

the monitor (Direct Connection)

1 Turn on the power of the monitor.

The screen to select the language opens.

Basic Operation

2 Select the language to be displayed on

5 Turn on the power of the sensor.

Turn on the power of the sensor before the monitor
is restarted by tapping the [OK] button in step 6.

6 Tap the [OK] button.

the monitor and tap the [OK] button.

The monitor restarts and connects to the

sensor.
[English] is selected in the default setting.

3 Set the current date and time, and tap the

[OK] button.

yyMove to the item to be set by the [] or []

button and enter the numbers.
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of
the selected item.

4 Select the [Direct Connection] button and

yyWhen the monitor is connected with the sensor

for the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. For
the details of procedures, refer to
Operation
for initial startup of the sensor (Page 3-11).
yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor,
the run screen opens.
yyWhen the connection is unavailable with the frozen
connection screen, refer to
Remedy when
direct connection is unavailable (Page A-28).
yyFor the direct connection, the IP address is
automatically set.
yyIf the PC is directly connected with the sensor
when the PROFINET function is being used,
the PROFINET function will stop. To use the
PROFINET function again, restart the sensor.

tap the [OK] button.

To use the FTP client function or field network,

select the [Network Connection] button.
The Complete Configuration screen opens.
3-6

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Operation when the Power is Turned on

Operation for initial startup of

the monitor (Network Connection)

4 Select the [Network Connection] button

and tap the [OK] button.

When connecting to a network, let engineers who

are knowledgeable about networks handle it.

3
Basic Operation

Setting the network address of the

monitor

1 Turn on the power of the monitor.

The screen to select the language opens.

2 Select the language to be displayed on

The Complete Configuration screen opens.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

the monitor and tap the [OK] button.

The Network Settings screen opens.

[English] is selected in the default setting.

6 Tap each [Edit] button of the IP address,

subnet mask, and default gateway.

3 Set the current date and time, and tap the

[OK] button.

The screen to set each item opens.

yyMove to the item to be set by the [] or []
button and enter the numbers.
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of
the selected item.

At the initial startup or initialization of

the monitor, the monitor starts up with
192.168.10.1 as the IP address.
If there is a device with the same IP address
on the network, change the IP address before
connecting the monitor to the network.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

3-7

Operation when the Power is Turned on

7 Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and

Default Gateway individually, and then tap

the [OK] button.
IP address

3
Basic Operation

The system returns to the network setup screen.

8 Tap the [OK] button.

Searching for a sensor to be connected

Automatically searches for a sensor on the network
and connects with it.
yyThe search time is about 10 seconds.
yySearching range and retrievable number of units
are as follows.
yySensor with no IP address (default) :
A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved within a
range that the BOOTP packet from the sensor
reaches (Page A-40).
yySensor with IP address :
A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on
the local network to which the monitor is
connected.

1 Turn on the power of the sensor.

2 Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
The monitor restarts.
After restarted, the Sensor Connect screen
opens.

Searching for sensor begins.

There are two ways to set the sensor to be

connected. For details of procedures, refer to
each reference.

When the sensor on the network is

zz
searched

Searching for a sensor to be connected

(Page 3-8)

When the sensor is specified by the IP

zz
address

When the searching is finished, the searched

result will be displayed.
If no sensor is found, refer to
When the
connection cannot be established by searching
for the sensor (Page A-30).

Specifying sensor to be connected by IP

address (Page 3-10)

3-8

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Operation when the Power is Turned on

When a sensor with no IP address is found

zz

The confirmation dialog appears.

Empty

Tap the [Yes] button to copy the network

settings of the monitor.
When copying is completed, the information
screen opens.

IP address

3 When multiple sensors are found, select

the sensor to be connected with the [<] or

[>] button.

4 Connect to the sensor.

Tap the [OK] button.

The sensor network setup screen opens.

When connecting to the sensor with no IP

zz
address

Tap the [Connect] button.

Tap each [Edit] button of the IP address, subnet

mask, and default gateway, and set these items
individually.
The confirmation dialog appears.

When the monitor's IP address is copied,

the sensor's and monitor's IP address will be
duplicated. Make sure to change the IP address.
IP address

Tap the [OK] button.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

3-9

Basic Operation

When a sensor with an IP address is found

zz

Operation when the Power is Turned on

The system returns to the network setup screen

for the sensor to be connected.

Specifying sensor to be connected by

IP address
Used when the IP address of the sensor to be
connected is defined beforehand.

3
Basic Operation

1 Turn on the power of the sensor.

2 Tap the [Specify Sensor] button.
Tap the [Connect] button.
yyWhen the monitor is connected with the sensor
for the first time, set the polarity of the sensor. For
the details of procedures, refer to
Operation
for initial startup of the sensor (Page 3-11).
yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor,
the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen
opens.

3 Enter the IP address of the sensor to be

connected and tap the [Connect] button.

When connecting to the sensor with set IP

zz
address

Tap the [Connect] button.

The run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu

screen opens.

The monitor connects to the selected sensor

and the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu
screen opens.

3-10

If the monitor cannot connect with the sensor, refer

to
When the connection cannot be established
by specifying the sensor (Page A-31).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Operation when the Power is Turned on

Operation for initial startup of

the sensor
When the monitor is connected to the sensor in
the default setting, the screen to select the polarity
(NPN or PNP) opens.
After the polarity is selected, set up the sensor in
Settings Navigator.
For details of the Polarity, refer to
Specification
of I/O circuit and current of the sensor (Page 2-14).

3
Basic Operation

1 Select the Polarity of the sensor and tap

the [OK] button.

The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

2 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button and set up

the program.

For details of the Settings Navigator, refer to

Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

3-11

Setting to the Factory Default

Setting to the Factory Default

3 Tap the [System] button and then the

Initializing the sensor

Initializes information set in the sensor and uses
factory default setting.

3
Basic Operation

yyThe following settings will not be initialized.

yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP)
(Page 6-28)
yyNetwork Settings (IP Address / Subnet Mask /
Default Gateway / Port number (TCP))
(Page 6-31)
yyTo initialize the registered programs individually,
refer to Initializing a program (Page 6-13).

[Initialize Sensor] button.

4 Tap the [Go] button.

1 Set the menu display of the monitor to ON

and tap the [Sensor Setup] button.

The confirmation dialog appears.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

2 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button.

The Sensor Advanced screen opens.

3-12

Initialization begins. After initialization is completed,

the initialization completion screen opens.

6 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Sensor Advanced

screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting to the Factory Default

4 Tap the [OK] button.

Initializing the monitor

Initializes information set in the monitor and uses
factory default setting.

1 Set the menu display of the monitor to ON

and tap the [Monitor Settings] button.

Initialization begins. After initialization is completed,

the initialization completion screen opens.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The Monitor Settings screen opens.

2 Tap the [System] button and then the

[Initialize Monitor] button.

3 Tap the [Go] button.

The monitor restarts.

After restarting, set the display language, date
and time, and the connection method with the
sensor.
For the connection method with the sensor,
there are Direct Connection and Network
Connection.
Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(Direct Connection) (Page 3-6)
Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(Network Connection) (Page 3-7)

The confirmation dialog appears.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

3-13

Basic Operation

The following settings will not be initialized.

yyLanguage (Page 6-51)
yyTime (Page 6-51)

Basic Operation for the Monitor

Basic Operation for the Monitor

Editing the value with the slider

The value of a trigger interval and the threshold of

each tool can be edited.
This section explains how to edit the value with
the slider using an example of a trigger interval in
[Internal].

Setting by the [+] / [-] button

zz
By tapping the [+] / [-] button, the value of a
trigger interval increases or decreases (slider
slides in accordance with the value changed).

Basic Operation

1 In the Image Optimization settings of

The value
is updated
according to the
slider position

the Settings Navigator, tap the [Internal]

button in [Trigger Options].
The slider appears on the monitor.
Tap the [+] / [-] button to slide the
slider

For the slider which sets both upper and lower

limit, select the slider to be set and tap the [+] /
[-] button to set it.

Setting by inputting a value

zz
Set the trigger interval.

Setting by the slider

zz
Touch the slider, and then slide it to the right or
left to set the trigger interval. According to the
slider position, the value of a trigger interval is
updated.

By tapping the button of the trigger interval,

the screen to input a value opens.
Input the value of a trigger interval and tap the
[OK] button.

Tap the button

The value
is updated
according to the
slider position
Slide the slider to the right or left

Input the value

of a trigger
interval

yyBy tapping the

reset to 0.
yyBy tapping the
can be deleted.

3-14

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

button, the value can be

button, the last number

Basic Operation for the Monitor

Changing the size of the tool window

zz

Editing the tool window

The tool window displayed when the tool is set in
the Settings Navigator can be edited to any size or
direction.
This section explains how to edit the tool window
using an example of [Outline] tool.

By touching either side of the tool window,

will be displayed. The height or width of
or
the tool window can be changed by touching
and dragging it.

Navigator, tap the [Add Tool] button and

tap the [Outline] button.
The tool window of the Outline tool will be
displayed at the center of the monitor.

By touching one of the corners of the tool

will be displayed. The size of the
window,
tool window can be changed by touching and
dragging it.

Tool window

2 Set the tool window of the Outline tool.

Selecting the shape of the tool window

zz
On the screen to set the detection tool, the
screen to select the shape of the tool window
opens by tapping the [Window Shape ] button.
[ Rect] or [ Circle] can be selected.
Rect

When the [ Circle] is selected in the Window

shape settings, the size of the circle can be
changed by touching and dragging the outline
of the circle.

Circle

Changing the direction of the tool window

zz
By touching and dragging the arrow mark on
the upper right of the tool window, the direction
of the tool window can be changed.

Moving the tool window

zz
By tapping inside the tool window,

will be

displayed. Move the tool window by touching

and dragging it.
The operations when an image is enlarged by
the [Zoom] button are as follow.
yySlide the slider while tapping inside the tool
window to move the tool window.
yySlide the slider while tapping outside the tool
window to change the image display position.
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

3-15

Basic Operation

1 In the tool setting of the Settings

Basic Operation for the Monitor

3 Edit the program name.

Inputting characters

The programs or tools to be displayed on the

monitor can be named arbitrary.
This section explains how to input characters using
an example of [Program Name].

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

(5)

Basic Operation

(6)

According to the items to be set, the number of

characters, character types, and characters which
can be input are different.

(7)

On the Sensor Setup Menu screen, tap the

[Detail] button.

(8)

(9)

(1) Program name

Displays a program name being editing.
(2) [] button
Moves a cursor position to the left.
(3) [] button
Moves a cursor position to the right.
(4) [Delete] button
Deletes one character to the left of the cursor.

2 Select the program to change the name

and tap the [Edit] button.

Select the
program

(5) Number of characters which can be input

Displays a number of characters that can be
input as a program name.
(6) Character button
Inputs an arbitrary character.
According to selection of the [Upper/Lower]
button, characters that can be input are different.
(7) [Upper/Lower] button
Switches a character to be input to uppercase /
lowercase.
(8) [Cancel] button
Cancels a character input setting and returns to
the Program details screen.
(9) [OK] button
Saves a character input setting and returns to
the Program details screen.

4 After the characters are entered, tap the

[OK] button.

3-16

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Basic Operation for the Monitor

Selecting the file in the USB memory

5 Select the file to be sent.

(1)

This section explains how to select the file in the USB

memory connected to the monitor using an example
of [Transfer Program Settings].

(2)

1 On the Sensor Setup Menu screen, tap the

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

Basic Operation

[USB Memory] button.

(9)

(1) Folder display

Displays a tree of currently displayed folder.

2 Tap the [Transfer Program Settings] button.

(2) [Up One Folder]

By selecting the [Up One Folder] and tapping
the [OK] button, you can go to the upper
hierarchy of currently displayed folder.
(3) File / Folder display
Displays a file and folder stored in the currently
displayed folder.
By selecting the folder and tapping the [OK]
button, you can go into the selected folder.
(4) [First] button
Moves to top page in the folder.

The confirmation dialog appears.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

The folder and file in the USB memory are displayed.

4 Select the folder that stores the data and

tap the [OK] button.

Select

The folder and file stored in the selected folder

will be displayed.

(5) [<<] button

Moves to previous page in the folder.
(6) [>>] button
Moves to next page in the folder.
(7) [Last] button
Moves to last page in the folder.
(8) [Cancel] button
Cancels a setting and returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
(9) [OK] button
When the folder is selected, you can go into the
selected folder. When the file is selected, the
selection of a file will be determined.

6 After selecting a file, tap the [OK] button

and proceed to the next setting.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

3-17

Basic Operation for the Monitor

MEMO

3
Basic Operation
3-18

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4


Settings Navigator

This chapter explains the functions and operations

of the [Settings Navigator].

(Setting the Judgment Condition)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-1

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Settings Navigator..............................................4-2
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator......4-3
1. Image Optimization
(Clearly Image a Target).....................................4-6
2. Master Registration (Registering
an Image as a Reference for Judgment)........4-20
3. Tool Settings 
(Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)...4-28
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of
Outputting to Output Line)..............................4-60
Display Method of
Extended Functions Menus.............................4-66

Settings Navigator

Settings Navigator
In the Settings Navigator, the setting items of the program required for judging the target with the sensor
are set in each step. While sequentially following the steps with navigation buttons, perform the setting
using the menu buttons in accordance with the Settings Navigator guide.
Navigation
button

Settings
Navigator guide

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Menu button

Flow in the Settings Navigator

STEP 1. Image Optimization settings
Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for
defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target. Set the trigger
option, adjust the brightness and imaging focus.
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target) (Page 4-6)

STEP 2. Registration of a master image

Image the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the
reference of judgment.
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)
(Page 4-20)

STEP 3. Tool settings

Set the tool to judge a target. Set the tool onto the master image and set the
threshold for judgment. Up to 16 detection tools and 1 position adjustment
tool in one program can be set.
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-28)

STEP 4. Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line (OUT1 to OUT4).
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)
(Page 4-60)

4-2

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

Starting the Settings Navigator

Turn on the power of the sensor and

monitor.

6 Perform the following operation.

When the program which has not been set

zz
in step 5 is selected
Tap the [Start] button.

When the sensor is in the following condition,

the Sensor Setup Menu will be displayed.
Proceed to step 5.
yyWhen the power is turned on for the first time
yyIf all programs are not being set
yyIf the sensor is being setting up
The Settings Navigator guide screen opens.
Tap the [OK] button and start setting [1. Image
Optimization].
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a
Target) (Page 4-6)

When the program which has been set in

zz
step 5 is selected

Tap the [Start] button. Or tap the shortcut button

for each step.

The menu bar appears.

3 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button.

Shortcut button

The Settings Navigator guide screen of the

selected step opens.
The confirmation dialog appears.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

5 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button.

Tap the [OK] button and start the setting.

1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a
Target) (Page 4-6)
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
as a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for
Targets) (Page 4-28)
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of
Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)
The Navi guide can be turned OFF if the
display of the Navi guide screen is not needed.

The startup screen of the Settings Navigator opens.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-3

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

2 Tap the [Menu] button.

Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

This section explains each setting screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.
For details of the contents that can set on each setting screen and its operation, refer to the applicable
references.
A

1. Image Optimization

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

1. Image Optimization

(Clearly Image a Target)
(Page 4-6)

A
2. Master Registration
2. Master Registration
(Registering an Image as a
Reference for Judgment)
(Page 4-20)

A
A
3. Tool Settings
3. Tool Settings (Setting the
Judgment Method for Targets)
(Page 4-28)

4. Output Assignment
4. Output Assignment
(Setting Details of Outputting
to Output Line) (Page 4-60)

4-4

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

Displaying the Settings Navigator guide

When the Navi Guide is ON
zz

The settings in the Settings Navigator will be

saved and the system returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
yyBy tapping the [No] button, the confirmation
dialog to cancel the settings appears. By
tapping the [Yes] button, the screen closes
without saving the settings.
yyBy tapping the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.

Finishing without completing the step

1 Tap the [Save] button at the upper right of

the screen.

You can display the function guide by tapping

the
button on the upper right of the screen
when operating the corresponding functions.

When the Navi Guide is OFF

zz
The step guide / extended functions guide /
function guide are not displayed

Finishing the Settings Navigator

This section explains the procedure for finishing the
Settings Navigator.

Finishing by completing all steps

1 Set all steps in the Settings Navigator.

2 Tap the [Complete] button at the lower

right of the [Output Assignment] screen.

When the required settings are completed

zz
The confirmation dialog to save appears.

When the required settings are not

zz
completed

The confirmation dialog to finish appears.

yyBy tapping the [Yes] button, the confirmation
dialog to save appears.
yyBy tapping the [No] button, the system returns
to the Settings Navigator screen.
The required settings have not been completed
yet. Even if the [OK] button is tapped, the
proper operation cannot be performed.

2 Tap the [Yes] button.

The settings in the Settings Navigator will be

saved and the system returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.

When the program setting is changed,

the confirmation dialog to save appears.

yyBy tapping the [No] button, the confirmation

dialog to cancel the settings appears. By
tapping the [Yes] button, the screen closes
without saving the settings.
yyBy tapping the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-5

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

yyThe step guide appears only the first time

when moving to each step.
yyThe extended functions guide appears only
the first time when displaying the Extended
Functions menu.
yyTo display the step guide and extended
functions guide again, finish and then start the
Settings Navigator again.
yyThe function guide always appears when
touching the following function buttons.
Focus Adjustment / Fine Tune Outline / Margin /
Color Extraction / Brightness Extraction /
Fixed Reference Area

3 Tap the [Yes] button.

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)

Setting the Image Optimization
In this section, set the Image Optimization for taking an image of a target. Adjust the image for defining
differences in high and low-quality-targets.

Trigger Options
zz

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the
Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can
image a target at any timing and can image continuously.
Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8)
Checking the view and installed distance (Page 2-2)

Auto Brightness Adjustment

zz
The sensor images a target by receiving the reflected light of the built-in light exposed to a target using
the CMOS image sensor.
In the Auto Brightness Adjustment, a target can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by
automatically adjusting the light intensity and shutter speed according to the shape and surface
condition (color, shininess, material).
Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)

Focus Adjustment
zz
Adjusts the focus of lens. Adjusts for clearly imaging the shape of a target. Auto focus can adjust the
focusing position automatically.
Focus Adjustment (Page 4-12)

4-6

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Auto Brightness Adjustment

Focus Adjustment

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

Main screen for the Image Optimization

This section explains the main screen for the Image Optimization.
(1)

(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(2)

(8)

(9)

(1) [Back] button

The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu
screen.
(2) Image taken by the sensor
Displays an image taken by the sensor.
The image type to be displayed differs depending
on the settings screen.
(3) [Save] button
Saves the settings and returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
(4) [Image Type] display
Displays the image type.
yy

.................Displays an image taken by

the currently imaging sensor.

(5) [Trig] button

Displayed when an external trigger is set.
The [Trig] and [Pause] button switches by each
time the button is tapped.
yy[Trig]..................Images by temporarily inputting
the internal trigger. Tap this
button when the position is to be
defined while a target is being
imaged in a state where the
external trigger cannot be input.
yy[Pause]..............Finishes the imaging with
internal trigger.

(10)

(11)

(7) Extended functions display button

Displays the extended functions menu for the
Image Optimization.
Extended functions for the Image Optimization
(Page 4-16)
(8) [Trigger Options] button
Performs the settings for the Trigger Options.
Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8)
(9) [Auto Brightness Adjustment] button
Automatically adjusts brightness.
Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
(10) [Focus Adjustment] button
Automatically adjusts focus.
Focus Adjustment (Page 4-12)
(11) [Next] button
Proceeds to "2. Master Registration".
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as
a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)

(6) [Zoom] button

Switches to full-screen display and the image of
the sensor can be zoomed.
Switching the display to the full-screen mode
(Page 5-5)
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-7

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

(7)

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration

Auto Brightness Adjustment

3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

Setting the Trigger Options

A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the
Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can
image a target at any timing, and can image continuously.

Settings for the Trigger Options

Items

Description

Setting range

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Default
value

yyInternal
Starts imaging continuously within
the time interval specified in the
trigger interval setting.
Trigger
(Trigger type)

Trigger interval

Select the type of the timing to

start imaging.

Set when the [Internal] is

selected in the trigger type
setting.

yyExternal
Starts imaging with the external
Internal
trigger synchronized with the
target's motion from a photoelectric
sensor or PLC installed outside.
The time (trigger delay) between
inputting the trigger until imaging
starts can be set.

1 to 10000 ms

50 ms

Set an interval (cycle) to

automatically start imaging.
Set when the [External] is
selected in the trigger type
setting.

Trigger Delay

4-8

Used when the output timing

of the sensor for the trigger
0 to 1000 ms
occurrence and the imaging
timing of this device cannot be
synchronized.
This device starts imaging after
the time set in the trigger delay
of the trigger input passes.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

0 ms

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Auto Brightness Adjustment

Focus Adjustment

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

Internal trigger
zz
Trigger interval Trigger interval
(1)
Internal trigger
Imaging/
internal processing

(2)

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

(3)
Status output

(1) The trigger will be input automatically according to the trigger interval settings.
(2) Performs the internal processing after the imaging.
(3) Outputs the status result.

External trigger
zz
Trigger delay
(1)
External trigger
Imaging/
internal processing

(2)
(3)

Status output

(1) Start imaging by inputting the trigger at an arbitrary timing.


When the trigger delay interval is set, the imaging start time will be delayed in the specified period.
(2) Performs the internal processing after imaging.
(3) Outputs the status result.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-9

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration

Auto Brightness Adjustment

3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment

When the [Internal] is selected in step 4

zz

Start the Settings Navigator.

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)

2 Display the main screen for the Image

Optimization.

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

(Page 4-4)

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

3 Tap the [Trigger Options] button.

The screen to set the Trigger Options opens.

Extended functions

5 Set the trigger interval or trigger delay.

Setting the Trigger Options

4. Output Assignment

Select the trigger type.

Set the trigger interval within the range of 1 to

10000 ms.
If the internal trigger time is shorter than the
processing time (Page 5-40), a trigger error
occurs.
Internal trigger (Page 7-3)
Error Messages (Page A-22)

When the [External] is selected in step 4

zz
Set the trigger delay within the range of 1 to
1000 ms.

Select the [Internal] or [External] button.

The setting of the trigger interval and trigger

delay can be changed by using the slider or
inputting the value.
Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-14)

6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Image Optimization.

4-10

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Auto Brightness Adjustment

Auto Brightness Adjustment

In the Auto Brightness Adjustment, the target
can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by
automatically adjusting a light intensity, an exposure
time and an imaging mode according to the shape
and surface condition (color, shininess, material).

1 Start the Settings Navigator.

2 Display the main screen for the Image

Optimization.

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

(Page 4-4)

Extended functions

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Image Optimization.

yyThe brightness of an image can be adjusted

manually.
Advanced Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-18)
yyDuring the auto brightness adjustment, the
sensor automatically images a target by
inputting the internal trigger regardless of the
Trigger Options settings.
yyDo not move a target during the auto brightness
adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted
correctly.

3 Tap the [Auto Brightness Adjustment]

button.

After the adjustment is completed, the

Brightness adjustment completed. message
appears.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-11

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)

Focus Adjustment

4. Output Assignment

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration

Auto Brightness Adjustment

3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment

Focus Adjustment
Adjusts the focusing position for clearly imaging the
shape of a target.
Adjusting the methods differ depending on the type
of the sensor connected (manual focusing type/
auto focusing type).

Auto focusing type

zz

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

The focus position is adjusted automatically.

When the [Auto] button is tapped, the focusing
position is adjusted automatically again.
The focus can be adjusted manually with the
slider displayed on the monitor.
When the sensor detects multiple matching
positions for the focusing position, the optional
positions are marked on the slider. Select
the focus position from the detected optional
positions.

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

Focus adjustment for the auto focusing

type

1 Start the Settings Navigator.

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)

2 Display the main screen for the Image

Optimization.

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

(Page 4-4)

3 Tap the [Focus Adjustment] button.

Manual focusing type

zz
Turn the focus adjustment screw using the
attached flathead screwdriver to adjust the
focusing position.

When the [Auto Focus Adj Pos] (Page 6-42) is

set to [Common], the following dialog appears.

yyPlace a target at the appropriate position.

Mounting the Sensor (Page 2-2)
yyDo not move a target during the focus adjustment.
The focus may not be adjusted correctly.

The guide screen for the Focus Adjustment opens.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The focusing position is adjusted automatically.

4-12

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Auto Brightness Adjustment

5 Adjust the focusing position as needed.

When the focusing position is to be

zz
adjusted automatically again

When the [Auto] button is tapped, the focusing

position is adjusted automatically again.

adjusted manually

Adjust the focus by the slider.

Extended functions

6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Image Optimization.
When the [Cancel] button is tapped, the focus
will be reset to the previous position.
yyDuring the auto adjustment, the sensor
automatically images a target by inputting the
internal trigger regardless of the Trigger Options
settings (Page 4-8). Also, when the continuous
lighting (Page 4-18) is set, the sensor images
with the flash lighting.
yyThe auto adjustment searches the positions that
can be focused over the entire area regardless
of the imaging area settings (Page 4-17).

For details of settings by using the slider, refer to

Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-14).

When multiple focusing positions exist

zz
When there are multiple positions that can be
focused, the sensor adjusts to the closest position
to the sensor. The options of the position that can
be focused will be indicated with ( ) mark.
To change the focusing position to the optional
position, tap the [Next Pos] or the options ( ) of
the focusing position.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-13

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

When the focusing position is to be

zz

Focus Adjustment

4. Output Assignment

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration

Auto Brightness Adjustment

3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment

Focus adjustment for the manual

focusing type

1 Start the Settings Navigator.

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

6 Turn the focus adjustment screw of

the sensor with the attached flathead

screwdriver, and adjust the focus until the
focus value reaches the peak mark.

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)

2 Display the main screen for the Image

Optimization.

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

(Page 4-4)

3 Tap the [Focus Adjustment] button.

Bar gauge

Peak mark

The Settings Navigator guide opens.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The focus indicator will be displayed on the

monitor.

5 Image the target.

If the target is to be imaged using an external

trigger, input the external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by

inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging

by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the
button.

The peak mark is displayed on the position

where the focus is at the maximum. Turn the
focus adjustment screw to make the bar gauge
on the peak mark position.
By tapping the [Clear peak] button, the peak
mark will be hidden, and the current focusing
value will be updated as a maximum value.
When the focus cannot be adjusted by
watching the focus indicator on the monitor,
you can check with the blinking cycle of the
STATUS and OUT of the indicator light.
yyQuickly blinks....... Focused.
yySlowly blinks........ Not focused. Adjust to the
most blinking position.
STATUS indicator light

OUT indicator light

4-14

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Auto Brightness Adjustment

Focus Adjustment

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

7 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Image Optimization.
The focus indicator indicates the positions that
can be focused over the entire area regardless of
the imaging area settings (Page 4-17).

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-15

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration

Auto Brightness Adjustment

3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

Extended functions for the Image Optimization

Adjust the Image Optimization in the extended functions menu.

Items of extended functions for the Image Optimization

Items

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Imaging
Area

Description

Default
value

Setting range

Sets the imaging area (image

size of the sensor). When the
imaging area is reduced, the
shutter speed and judging
process become faster.
Bright
Adjusts the brightness of an
image manually.

yyEntire
Sets the field of view of the imaging area for
the sensor to the entire area.
yyPartial
Edit a tool window and set an arbitrary area in
the sensor's field of view as an imaging area.
Standard range type (color)

Entire

1 to 100

Standard range type (monochrome) 1 to 120

Short range type

1 to 120

Long rang type

1 to 100

20

Imaging Mode
Selects imaging mode for
sensor.

yyNormal
This mode is the basic imaging mode. The
target can be imaged with less noise.
yyHDR
Select to image a target such as a metal that
reflects light and has high contrast.
yyHighGain
Select to shorten the exposure time and when
the imaging environment is in a dark place.
Lowers imaging quality due to high gain.

Normal

Lighting

Selects lighting mode for built-in

light.

yyOFF
Turns OFF the built-in light.
yyFlash
The built-in light lights within the exposure
when imaging.
yyContinuous
The built-in light lights continuously regardless of
specified exposure time when imaging a target.

Flash

Color
Filters

Applies color filters if the outline

of a certain color cannot be
displayed when the image is
displayed in monochrome by a
color type sensor.
(Color type only)

OFF/Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

OFF

Digital
Zoom

Switches digital zoom ON/OFF.

Images by magnifying the center
field two times. The field of view
ON/OFF
of horizontal and vertical sides
will be a half size.
(Monochrome type only)

Advanced
Brightness
Adjustment

4-16

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

OFF

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration
Auto Brightness Adjustment

Imaging Area

1 Display extended functions menu for the

Image Optimization.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

3. Tool Settings

Tap the [Imaging Area] button.

Focus Adjustment

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

For details of editing the tool window, refer to

Editing the tool window (Page 3-15).

4 After the setting is completed,

tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Image Optimization.

The screen to set the imaging area opens.

3 Select type of imaging area.

Outside of specified area

If [Partial] is selected, edit the imaging area.

Imaging area

yyIf the tool has been set, a rectangular area

containing tool windows of all tools which have
been set will be displayed as [Actv Range].
The imaging area cannot be set smaller than
the active range. To narrow down the imaging
area, change the placement of the tool
windows before adjusting the imaging area.
yySet an area including the center of the field of
the view when trapezoidal correction (Page
6-38) is to be performed. A region that cannot
be exposed is created in the exposure area.
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-17

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

When an imaging area is specified, the area

outside the specified area will be displayed in
black.

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration

Auto Brightness Adjustment

3. Tool Settings
Focus Adjustment

Extended functions

Advanced Brightness Adjustment

Lighting

1 Display extended functions menu for the

1 Display extended functions menu for the

Image Optimization.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

4. Output Assignment

2 Tap the [Advanced Brightness Adjustment]

Image Optimization.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

button.

2 Tap the [Lighting] button.

The screen to adjust brightness opens.

3 Select the lighting mode from

3 Set brightness and an imaging mode.

According to the brightness and imaging mode,

the exposure time will be calculated automatically.

[OFF]/[Flash]/[Continuous].

Exposure time

4 After the setting is completed,

tap the [OK] button.

yyFor the details of settings with the slider or

by inputting a value, refer to
Editing the
value with the slider (Page 3-14).
yyBy tapping the [Auto] button, a light intensity,
an exposure time and an imaging mode can
be adjusted automatically.

4 After the setting is completed,

tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Image Optimization.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Image Optimization.
yyIf the lighting mode is changed, re-register
the master image and re-set the tool.
Otherwise a correct judgment may not be
possible.
yyWhen [Continuous] has been selected,
the light goes off for approximately 0.3 ms
right before imaging.

When the master image is registered and

settings other than Trigger Options and
imaging area are changed, the confirmation
message that recommends you to re-register
the master image appears. Tap the [OK]
button and re-register the master image.
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
as a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)
4-18

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Trigger Options

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Auto Brightness Adjustment

Color Filters (color type only)

This is disabled for the Color Area tool.

1 Display extended functions menu for the

Image Optimization.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

Focus Adjustment

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)

1 Display extended functions menu for the

Image Optimization.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

2 Tap the [Digital Zoom] button.

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

2 Tap the [Color Filters] button.

3 Set the digital zoom to [ON]/[OFF].

The image changes to monochrome. In the
example in the figure above, the red and blue
outlines become unclear.

3 Select the color to apply the color filter.

Select the filter for the color or the complementary

color to be detected. Select red here.

4 After the setting is completed,

tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Image Optimization.

The color filter corresponding to the selected

color will be applied. The red color becomes
brighter and the outline with the blue color
becomes clear.

Clarified outline

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the
Image Optimization.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-19

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

2. Master Registration
(Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)
Registers a master image to be a reference for judgment.

Main screen for the Master Registration

This section explains the main screen for the master image registration.

(1)

(3)
(4)

(2)

(5)

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(1) [Back] button

Returns to the settings screen for the Image
Optimization.
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)
(Page 4-6)

(6) Extended functions display button

Displays extended functions menu for the
master image registration.
For details, refer to
Extended functions for
the Master Registration (Page 4-22).

(2) Master image

Displays a master image. If no master image is
registered, [No Master Image] will be displayed.

(7) [Register Live Image as Master] button

Registers an image taken by the sensor as a
master image.
For details, refer to
Registering the master
image (Page 4-21).

(3) [Save] button

Saves the settings and returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
(4) [Image Type] display
Displays an image type.
yy
yy
yy
yy
yy

.................Displays a master image (still

image).
.................Displays an image taken by
the sensor which is currently
imaging.
.................Displays an image in the
Sensor Image History.
.................Displays an image in USB
memory.
.................Indicates that the monitor is in
the Test mode.

(8) [Next] button

Proceeds to "3. Tool settings".
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment
Method for Targets) (Page 4-28)

(5) [Zoom] button

Switches the display in full-screen mode and
makes it possible to enlarge an image on the
monitor.
For details, refer to
Switching the display to
the full-screen mode (Page 5-5).

4-20

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Register Live Image as Master

Registering the master image

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

7 Tap the [OK] button.

1 Start the Settings Navigator.

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)

2 Display the main screen for the Master

Registration.

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

(Page 4-4)

of judgment on the imaging position.

4 Tap the [Register Live Image as Master]

button.

The master image will be registered and returns

to the main screen for the Master Registration.

The disabling outline settings (Page 4-35, Page 4-55)

will be initialized. Set the disabling outline settings
again as needed.

Switches to the [LIVE] screen.

5 Image the target.

If the target is to be imaged using an external

trigger, input the external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the
button.

6 Check the image displayed on the monitor

and tap the [Register] button.

The confirmation dialog for the Master Registration

appears.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-21

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

3 Place the high-quality-target as reference

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

Register Live Image as Master

3. Tool Settings

Extended functions

Extended functions for the Master

Registration
Items of extended functions for the
Master Registration

4. Output Assignment

Select Img From Image History

zz

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Registers an image of the image history in the

memory of the sensor as a master image.
To perform the master image registration from
the image history in the sensor, the image to
be registered as a master image in the image
history must be saved.
Sensor Image History (Confirming the
Images whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-14)

Master image registration from the

image history in the sensor
Registers an image of the image history in the
memory of the sensor as a master image.
Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-14)

1 Display the extended functions menu for

the Master Registration.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

2 Tap the [Select Img From Image History]

button.

Select Img From USB Memory

zz
Registers the image in USB memory as a master
image.
yySave the image to be registered as a master
image to the USB memory in advance.
yyThe files which can be registered as a
master image are batch backup files (*.iva)
and image capture files (*.ivp).
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
to a USB Memory (Page 6-18)

The [Sensor Image History] screen opens.

3 Select the image to be registered

as
a master image and tap the [Register]
button.

Brightness Correction
zz
Select the image

By setting a reference of brightness to the master

image, effects of changing the brightness can be
reduced.
yyThe brightness correction can be set when
the master image is registered.
yyFor the Color Area tool of the color type, the
brightness correction will be disabled.

For details of how to operate the screen,

refer to
Loading and confirming the saved
images (Page 6-15).
The selected screen opens on the monitor.

4-22

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Register Live Image as Master

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

4 Check the image displayed on the monitor

and tap the [Register] button.

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

The confirmation dialog appears.

If the imaging area of the loaded image is
different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
area that has not been imaged is registered,
the area will be displayed in black.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The new master image will be registered and

returns to the main screen for the Master
Registration.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-23

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

Register Live Image as Master

3. Tool Settings

Extended functions

Registering from the image in the USB

memory
Select the batch backup file (*.iva) or image capture
file (*.ivp) stored in USB memory, and register as a
master image.

4. Output Assignment

5 Select the image to be registered as

a master image and tap the [Register]

button.

Select the
image

When using a batch backup file (*.iva)

Backing up in a batch (Page 6-19)

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

1 Connect the USB memory which stores

the batch backup files (*.iva) to the USB

port.
Installing the USB memory (Page 6-18)

2 Display the extended functions menu for

the master image registration.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

3 Tap the [Select Img From USB Memory]

For details of how to operate the screen,

refer to
Loading and confirming the saved
images (Page 6-15).
The selected image will be magnified.

6 Check the image displayed on the monitor

and tap the [Register] button.

button.

The confirmation dialog appears.

The data in USB memory will be displayed.

4 Select the file to be registered as a master

image and tap the [OK] button.

If the imaging area of the loaded image is

different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
area that has not been imaged is registered,
the area will be displayed in black.

7 Tap the [OK] button.

Select the file

For details of selecting the files in the USB

memory, refer to
Selecting the file in the
USB memory (Page 3-17).
The image of selected file will be displayed.
4-24

The new master image will be registered and

returns to the main screen for the master image
registration.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Register Live Image as Master

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

When using an image capture file (*.ivp) 5 Check the image displayed on the monitor

Saving the image history individually (Page 6-20)

and tap the [Register] button.

1 Connect the USB memory which stores

the image capture files (*.ivp) to the USB

port.
Installing the USB memory (Page 6-18)

2 Display the extended functions menu for

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus
(Page 4-66)

3 Tap the [Select Img From USB Memory]

button.

The confirmation dialog appears.

If the imaging area of the loaded image is
different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
area that has not been imaged is registered,
the area will be displayed in black.

6 Tap the [OK] button.

The data in USB memory will be displayed.

4 Select the file to be registered as a master

image and tap the [OK] button.

Select the file

The new master image will be registered and

returns to the main screen for the master image
registration.

For details of selecting the files in the USB

memory, refer to
Selecting the file in the
USB memory (Page 3-17).
The selected image will be magnified.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-25

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

the master image registration.

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

Register Live Image as Master

3. Tool Settings

Extended functions

5 Set the tool window to be a reference of

Brightness correction
For the Color Area tool of the color type, this will
be disabled.

4. Output Assignment

brightness correction and tap the [OK]

button.

1 Display the extended functions menu for

the Master Registration.

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Tool window to
be a reference
of brightness
collection

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

2 Tap the [Brightness Correction] button.

The information screen opens (color type only).

3 Tap the [OK] button.

The settings screen for the Brightness Correction

opens.
In the case of color operation type, the image
will be displayed in monochrome.

For the region to be a reference of brightness

correction, specify the following.
yyA region with average medium brightness.
A region with strong shininess and reflection
and a region which is too dark may not be
corrected properly.
yyA region with a constant imaging status
which does not change such as device parts
other than the targets .
For details of editing the tool window, refer to
Editing the tool window (Page 3-15).

6 Tap the [Test] button.

4 Tap the [Select Region] button.

The screen to set a reference of the brightness

correction opens.

4-26

If the brightness in the specified region is

changed using the masking shield, check that
the brightness of the entire image is corrected.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Register Live Image as Master

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

7 Tap the [Before Corr]/[After Corr] button

and check the operation status before
brightness correction and status after
brightness correction.

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

8 Tap the [Back] button.

The system returns to the settings screen for

the Brightness Correction.

9 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Image Optimization.

yyWhen brightness correction is not to be used,

tap the [Delete] button on the screen in step 4.
yyBrightness correction corrects the brightness of
the entire image to make the average brightness
in the tool window to be a reference of brightness
correction the same as the brightness of the
master image.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-27

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

In this section, set the tool to judge whether a target

is high-quality-target or low-quality-target in the
master image.
The aspects of a target registered as a master
image are set as a high-quality-target. During an
operation, the sensor judges whether it is a highquality-target or low-quality-target by judging the
differences in the registered high-quality-target and
a target to be examined.
Up to 16 detection tools in one program and up to
1 position adjustment tool can be set. Those tools
can judge a target at the same time.

Selecting a tool according to its

intended purpose
Select a tool according to with the purpose of an
examination.

Types of tools
Outline tool
zz
A detection tool to calculate the matching rate for
the target to be examined based on the outline
information of a registered high-quality-target.
Judges whether a target is a high or low-qualityproduct by setting the threshold to the matching
rate.
Outline tool (Page 4-32)
Tool settings
Master image

Outline extraction processing

Processing and judgment during an operation

Internal processing

<Judge is OK>

Detection tool to be used

Purposes

Outline tool

Color Area/
Area tool

To detect the surface/

rear face of parts

To detect the
orientation of parts

To detect mixture of
parts with different
shapes

To detect assembly
deficiencies of parts

To detect processing
defects of parts

To detect differences
in sizes (areas)

To detect mixture of
different colors

Searches a target which has the outline of same shapes

as an outline of a high-quality-target.
Outline can be detected even if a target is rotated.
Example when the result was NG
No same shapes exist
(Detection of existence)

Different shape
(Shape detection)

Different direction
(Detection of direction)

The matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100.

100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.
The matching rate decreases in accordance with
the number of non-matched parts.

4-28

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool

zz

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

Position Adjustment tool

zz
A tool to correct the differences in positioning
(position gap) of a target to be examined. The
position adjustment is used with other detection
tools.
Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-51)
Tool settings

Master image

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

A tool to calculate the matching rate in the area

(number of pixels) of a target to be examined as
the basis (100 %) of the area (number of pixels)
of a registered high-quality-target. This judges
whether a target is a high or low-quality-product
by setting the threshold to the matching rate.
If the sensor is a color type, the tool will be Color
Area tool. The system judges by the area with an
arbitrary specified color.
If the sensor is a monochrome type, the tool will
be the Area tool. The system judges by the area
with an arbitrary specified brightness.
Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-40)
Tool settings
Color extraction process
(Color type)
Master image

Brightness extraction process

(Monochrome type)

Tool window
Position adjustment window

Processing during an operation

Position adjustment process

Processing and judgment during an operation

Internal processing

<Judge is OK>
Tool window
Position adjustment window
Search area of the tool window

Compares the area of a target as defining an

area of high-quality-target to 100 %.

Example when the judgment was NG

Area is narrow

Area is wide

yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100 (default).

100 indicates that an area is completely
matched. The matching rate decreases as
the area of a target narrows.
yyThe setting range of the display range and
threshold for matching rate can be changed to
0-200 or 0-999. Also, a target can be judged
by setting the threshold to the upper limit.
Setting the upper limit (Page 4-46)
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-29

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

Main screen for the Tool Settings

This section explains the main screen for the Tool settings.

(1)
(2)

(4)
(5)

(3)

(6)
(7)

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(1) [Back] button

Returns to the Master Registration screen.
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
as a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)

(7) [View] button

Displays a menu to select the display pattern of
tools.
Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)

(2) [Tool Name] button

Displays a name of the selected tool on the
monitor. From the pull-down menu, the selected
tool can be switched.

(8) Extended functions display button

Displays the extended functions menu for the
Tool Settings.
Extended functions for the Tool settings
(Page 4-58)

(3) Master image

Displays the master image and tool window. If
a search region is set, the tool window which
indicate the search region (light blue) will be
displayed.
By tapping the tool window, the selected tool
can be switched.
(4) [Save] button
Saves the settings.
Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5)
(5) [Image Type] display
Displays an image type.
yy
yy
yy

.................Displays a master image (still

image).
.................Indicates that the monitor is in
the Test mode.
.................Displays an image taken by
the sensor which is currently
imaging.

(9) [Add Tool] button

Adds tools.
Adding a tool (Page 4-31)
(10) [Edit Tool] button
Edits settings for the selected tool.
Editing a tool (Page 4-31)
(11) [Delete Tool] button
Deletes the selected tool.
Deleting a tool (Page 4-31)
(12) [Next] button
Proceeds to the Output Assignment settings.
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of
Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)

(6) [Zoom] button

Switches to the full-screen display and makes it
possible to enlarge an image on the monitor.
For details, refer to
Switching the display to
the full-screen mode (Page 5-5).
4-30

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

Editing a tool
Edits the settings of a tool which has already been set.

Adding a tool

1 Select a tool to edit the settings.

Newly sets a tool.

1 Tap the [Add Tool] button.

2 Tap the tool to be added.

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

yyIf no tools are set, only the [Add Tool] button

is displayed.
yyIf one or more tools are set in one program,
the [Edit Tool] and [Delete Tool] button are
displayed.

2 Tap the [Edit Tool] button.

3 Edit setting items for each tool.

Outline tool (Page 4-32)

Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-40)
Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-51)

Deleting a tool
Deletes an unnecessary tool.
By tapping the
tools appears.

button, the help screen for

1 Select a tool to be deleted.

3 Set setting items for each tool.

Outline tool (Page 4-32)

Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-40)
Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-51)

2 Tap the [Delete Tool] button.

The confirmation dialog appears.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

The selected tool will be deleted and returns to

the main screen for the Tool settings.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-31

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment

Extended functions

Outline tool
Setting items for the Outline tool
Items

Rect

Fine Tune Outline

Selects the window shape to

specify an area of the target
to be detected.

Entire
yyEntire
Specifies an area to search the
Specifies the entire imaging area as a (Without position
outline of a target. By specifying
adjustment)
search region.
the smaller area as a search
yyPartial
Partial
region, the processing time will
Specifies a search region to an arbitrary (With position
be shortened.
size in the imaging area.
adjustment)
yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
Judges by disabling an
You can undo back to 5 operations before.
unnecessary outline which
yyClear
interrupts the stabilized
Initializes all the disabling processes.
detection. Specify by tracing
yyEraser Width
the extracted outline with stylus.
Selects the eraser width (light/medium/
heavy) of the pen when specifying an
unnecessary outline.

Sensitivity

yy Rect
Specifies with the rectangular window.
An arbitrary size, position, and angle
can be specified with stylus.
yy Circle
Specifies with the circular window.
An arbitrary size and position can be
specified with stylus.

Remove Outline

Default value

Search Region

Edit Window

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Setting range

Window Shape

Description

yyHigh
Extracts an outline of the image with
low contrast. Used when an outline you
wish to detect cannot be extracted.
yyNorm
Extracts the standard outline.
yyLow
Reduces the extracted volume of an
outline. Reduces the extracted volume of
an outline that is not necessary to detect.

Limit
Adjustment

The extraction sensitivity of

an outline can be selected
according to the target.

Adjusts a threshold (matching

rate*) used in the OK/NG
judgment. During threshold
adjustment, the system turns
to the Test mode so that the
thresholds can be adjusted to
the applicable value during an
operation.

0 to 100

* 100 indicates that outline is completely matched.

Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of unmatched parts.
4-32

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Not specified

Norm

70

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration
Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

6 Select a tool window shape.

Setting the Outline tool

1 Start the Settings Navigator.

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)

2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings.

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow
(Page 4-4)

Circle

[Outline] button.

Adding a tool (Page 4-31)

The main screen for the Outline tool settings opens.

4 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

7 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the screen to set the

[Window Shape] and [Search Region].

8 Set the position, size, and angle of the

tool window in accordance with the target.

Set the tool
window

The screen to set the [Window Shape] and

[Search Region] opens.
yyOnce the tool window is tapped, you can
proceed to step 8.
yyBy tapping the < > extended functions
display button, the extended functions menu
for the Outline tool will be displayed.
Extended functions for the Outline tool
(Page 4-37)

5 Tap the [Window Shape] button.

For details of editing the tool window, refer to

Editing the tool window (Page 3-15).

9 Set a search region as needed.

Setting a search region (Page 4-35)

10 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Outline tool settings.

11 Adjust the outline as needed.

The screen to select the window shape opens.

Settings for disabling outlines (Page 4-35)

Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-36)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-33

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

3 Tap the [Add Tool] button and tap the

Rect

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

12 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.

4. Output Assignment

Extended functions

14 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection

by checking the matching rate.

<Setting example>
If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is
higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the lowquality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65
which is an intermediate value between 40 and 90.

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

The sensor turns to the Test mode.

13 Image a high-quality-target and a lowquality-target.

If the target is to be imaged using an external

trigger, input the external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the
button.

Matching rate

Threshold

yyA target is detected as OK if the matching

rate is greater than the threshold, and
detected as NG if the matching rate is lower
than the threshold.
yyAccording to the status result of the tool, the
display color of the tool changes.
Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)
yyThe threshold can be changed using the
slider or by inputting values.
Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-14)
yyThe thresholds can also be set in [Limit
Adjustment] of the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14)
yyFor details of the matching rate, refer to
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and
Position Adjustment Tool (Page A-5).

15 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Outline tool settings.

16 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Tool settings.
4-34

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration
Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

Setting a search region

Settings for disabling outlines

When a range of the search region is to be specified,

perform the following procedures.

Perform the following procedures to delete an

unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window.

1 Tap the [Search Region] button.

1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.

2 Tap the [Partial] button.

The Settings Navigator guide opens.

Tap the [OK] button.

2 Specify an outline which detection is not

needed by tracing it with stylus.

The specified outline changes from green to yellow.

The editing screen for a search region opens.

3 Set a tool window indicates the search region.

Search region

yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to

Editing the tool window (Page 3-15).
yyThe search region cannot be rotated.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

The outline that the

outline extraction has
disabled (yellow)

yyThe eraser width (light/medium/heavy) of the

pen when tracing an outline can be switched
via [Eraser Width].
yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 5 times.

3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Outline tool settings.

button.

The system returns to the screen to set [Window

Shape] and [Search Region].

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-35

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

The selection screen for a search region opens.

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment

Extended functions

Setting a sensitivity

According to the target, perform the following

procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an
outline is selected.

1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

The outline
cannot be
extracted

The Settings Navigator guide opens.

Tap the [OK] button.

2 Select the extraction sensitivity of an outline.

Select the [High] in this section.

3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

Extracted
outline

The system returns to the main screen for the

Outline tool settings.

4-36

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool > Extended functions

2. Master Registration
Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

Extended functions for the Outline tool

Items

Margin

Search
Algorithm

Setting range

Sets a range of the rotating direction to search

an outline of the target.
The system judges NG if an angle of the
target exceeds its rotation range even if the
target is the same shape.
yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too wide,
0 to 180 (Unit: 1)
the acceptable range of variations of angles
when a target is placed can be increased.
yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too
narrow, the processing time can be shorten.
yyThis can be used for judging the direction of
the target by limiting the rotation range.

Default
value

20

Select whether or not to allow the margin for

the limited angle set in Rotation Range.

yyON
The tool window will search
with the range few degrees
wider than the setting value of
rotation range.
yyOFF
The tool window will search only
within the set rotation range.

The detection mode of the Outline tool can be

selected according to the target.

yyHigh Accuracy
Differences in outlines can be
detected with a high degree of
accuracy.
High
yyHigh Speed
Outlines can be judged faster than Accuracy
in high accuracy mode.
There may be an influence from
the background or unnecessary
outlines other than the target.

An arbitrary name such as the name of a

target can be set in tools. Tool names can be
Tool Name
checked on the run screen.
Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting (Page 5-1)

Up to 8 characters in one byte

English characters can be set.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

ON

(None)

4-37

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Rotation
Range

Description

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

Outline tool > Extended functions

3. Tool Settings

Color Area/Area tool

Rotation Range

1 Display the extended functions menu of

the Outline tool.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button.

4. Output Assignment

Position Adjustment tool

Extended functions

5 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Outline tool settings.

Search Algorithm

1 Display the extended functions menu of

the Outline tool.

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

2 Tap the [Search Algorithm] button.

3 Set a rotation range of the Outline tool.

3 Select the type of search algorithm (High

Speed/High Accuracy).

For details of setting using the slider or by

inputting value, refer to
Editing the value
with the slider (Page 3-14).

4 Set a margin of the rotation range.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Outline tool settings.

yySelect [ON] when detection is not stable

because of the influence of the rotation angle
of the target. The tool window will search with
the range few degrees wider than the setting
value of rotation range. (The tool window
will search few degrees even if the rotation
range is set to 0)
yySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect
the target in accordance with the set rotation
angle of the target.
4-38

yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is not

stable because of a small difference in the
matching rate of a high and low-quality-target.
yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is
not stable because of the influence of an
unnecessary outline other than the target such
as the background.
yySelect [High Speed] to shorten the processing
time.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool > Extended functions

2. Master Registration
Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

Tool Name

1 Display the extended functions menu of

the Outline tool.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

The screen to set the tool name opens.

3 Input an arbitrary name.

For details of how to enter characters, refer to

Inputting characters (Page 3-16).

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Outline tool settings.
The tool name which has been set will be displayed.

If the display language (Page 6-51) is changed,

characters might be garbled.
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-39

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment

Extended functions

Color Area/Area tool

Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool
Items

Description

Setting range

Default
value

yy Rect
Specifies with the rectangular window.
An arbitrary size, position, and angle
can be specified with stylus.

yy Circle
Specifies with the circular window.
An arbitrary size and position can be
specified with stylus.

Rect

yyEntire
The entire area (imaging area) of
an image displayed in the monitor
becomes the extraction target.

Edit Window

Add Mask

Mask

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Window Shape

Select the window shape to

specify an area of the target
to be extracted.

Mask
Shape

Cut mask

Clip
Shape

Adds a rectangular/circular
mask region in the tool
window frame.
Inside the mask region
is excluded from an area
extraction target.
Adds a rectangular/circular
cutting region in the mask
region.
Inside the mask cutting
region, the mask is disabled
and it becomes the target of
the area extraction.

yy Rect
Specifies a rectangular mask region
or a mask cutting region. An arbitrary
size, position, and angle can be
specified with stylus.
yy Circle
Specifies a circular mask region or
a mask cutting region. An arbitrary
size and position can be specified
with stylus.

Rect

yySetting counts
Adding or cutting the mask can be
set up to 20 times.
yyExtract Area [+]
Expands a range of the color to be
extracted and expands an extraction
area.

Color Extraction
(For color type)

Tap a color to be extracted

on the master image and set
an extraction range.

yyExtract Area [-]

Contracts a range of the color to be
extracted and narrows an extraction
(No extraction)
area.
yyUndo
The previous operation can be
cancelled.
yyClear
Cancels the selection of the tapped
color.

to Live Image

4-40

The color range to be

extracted can be set on the
Live image of the target.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

Items

2. Master Registration
Color Area/Area tool

Description

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

Position Adjustment tool

Extended functions

Setting range

Default
value

yyExtraction Area
Sets the upper and the lower limit
of brightness in a range within 0 to
255 with the tapped brightness as a
Tap brightness to be extracted reference.
Brightness Extraction
(No extraction)
on the master image and set yyUndo
(For monochrome type)
the extraction range.
The previous operation can be
cancelled.

to Live Image

Limit Adjustment

A brightness range to be
extracted can be set on the
Live image of the target.

Adjusts a threshold
(matching rate*) used in the
OK/NG judgment. During the
thresholds adjustment, the
0 to 100 (when the upper limit setting
system switches to the Test is OFF)
mode so that a threshold can
be adjusted to an applicable
value during an operation.

Scale

yy0-200
When the upper limit of
Sets the upper and the lower limit of
the threshold is ON, select
a threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
the threshold scale in
y
0-999
y
accordance with the range
Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
of the matching rate required
threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
for the judgment.
The slider movement unit is 5.

Upper Limit

Upper
Limit

Sets the upper limit of the

threshold.
Set when the OK/NG
judgment is desired if the
target area is larger than the
OK area.

yyEnable
Activates the upper limit setting.
yyDisable
Deactivates the upper limit setting.

50

Disable

0-200

* The matching rate is 100 when an area matches perfectly. This becomes smaller with a narrower area
and larger with a wider area. If the matching rate exceeds the upper limit of the threshold adjusting
range, it will be saturated to the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-41

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

yyClear
Cancels the selection of the tapped
brightness.

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

Setting the Color Area/Area tool

4. Output Assignment

Extended functions

6 Select a tool window shape.

1 Start the Settings Navigator.

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)

2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings.

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

(Page 4-4)

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

3 Tap the [Add Tool] button and tap the

Rect

Circle

[ColorArea] button (color type) or [Area]

button (monochrome type).

Adding a tool (Page 4-31)

The main screen for the Color Area/Area tool
settings opens.

4 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will

be hidden.

7 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the screen to set the

[Window Shape] and [Mask].

8 Set the position, size, and angle of tool

window in accordance with a target.

Set the tool

window

The screen to set the [Window Shape] and

[Mask] opens.
yyOnce the tool window is tapped, you can
proceed to step 8.
yyBy tapping the < > extended functions
display button, the extended functions menu
for the Color Area/Area tool will be displayed.
Extended functions of the Color Area/
Area tool (Page 4-48)

5 Tap the [Window Shape] button.

For details of editing the tool window, refer to

Editing the tool window (Page 3-15).

9 Perform the mask setting as needed.

Inside the mask region is excluded from the

area extraction target.
Mask settings (Page 4-45)

10 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Color Area/Area tool settings.

The screen to select the window shape opens.

4-42

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration
Color Area/Area tool

11 Set the area to be the target to extract.

For color type
zz

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

For monochrome type

zz

Tap the [Brightness Extraction] button.

Tap the [Color Extraction] button.

The tapped color will be extracted.

yyIf the areas of color that have not been extracted
are tapped repeatedly, the extraction range can
be added.
yyTap the [+] / [-] button of the extraction range,
and the range of color to be extracted can be
expanded/reduced.

yyBy tapping the [to Live Image] button, the

range of the color to be extracted can be set
with the Live Image of the target.
yyWhen the color extraction is to be performed
again, tap the [Clear] button and then tap the
color to be the reference of judgment again.
After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for the
Color Area tool settings.

The tapped brightness will be extracted.

yyIf the areas of brightness that have not been
extracted are tapped repeatedly, the extraction
range can be added.
yyAdjust the slider, and the range of the brightness
to be extracted can be expanded/reduced.

yyFor details of settings by using the slider, refer to

Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-14).
yyBy tapping the [to Live Image] button, the
range of the brightness to be extracted can
be set with the Live image of the target.
yyWhen the brightness extraction is to be performed
again, tap the [Clear] button and then tap the color
to be the reference for judgment again.
After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for the
Area tool settings.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-43

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

The Settings Navigator guide opens.

Tap the [OK] button.
The screen to select a color to be extracted opens.
Tap the color to be the reference of judgment
for the color area.

The Settings Navigator guide opens.

Tap the [OK] button.
The screen to select brightness to be extracted
opens.
Tap the brightness to be the reference of
judgment for the color area.

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

12 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.

4. Output Assignment

Extended functions

15 Set the upper limit as needed.

Setting the upper limit (Page 4-46)

16 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Color Area/Area tool settings.

17 Tap the [OK] button.

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

The sensor turns to Test mode.

13 Image a high-quality-target and a lowquality-target.

If the target is to be imaged using an external

trigger, input the external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the
button.

14 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection

The system returns to the main screen for tool

settings.

by checking the matching rate.

<Setting example>
If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is
higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the lowquality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65
which is an intermediate value between 40 and 90.

Matching rate

Threshold

yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is

greater than the threshold, and detected as NG
if the matching rate is lower than the threshold.
yyIn accordance with status result of the tool,
the display color of the tool changes.
Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)
yyThe threshold can be changed using the
slider or by inputting values.
Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-14)
yyThe thresholds can also be set in [Limit
Adjustment] of the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14)
4-44

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration
Color Area/Area tool

Mask settings

Perform the following procedures if a mask region

is to be specified in the tool window.

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

5 Set the position, size, and angle of the

mask shape in accordance with the target.

Set mask shape

1 Tap the [Mask] button

2 Tap the [Add Mask] button.

6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the screen to set a mask

region.

7 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to cut a mask

region.

The screen to set a mask region and a mask

shape opens.

3 Tap the [Mask Shape] button.

The screen to set a mask cutting region and
cutting shape opens.

8 Tap the [Clip Shape] button.

4 Select the mask shape and tap the [OK]
button.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-45

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

The screen to set a mask region opens.

For details of editing the tool window, refer to

Editing the tool window (Page 3-15).

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

9 Select the cutting shape and tap the [OK]

button.

4. Output Assignment

Extended functions

Setting the upper limit

To perform the OK/NG judgment when an area of

the target is wider than an area of a high-qualitytarget, perform the following procedures.

1 Tap the [Upper Limit] button.

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

10 Set the position, size, and angle of the

cutting shape in accordance with the target.

Set clip shape

2 Tap the [Enable] button for the upper limit

threshold and select the scale.

For details of editing the tool window, refer to

Editing the tool window (Page 3-15).

11 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

Select the scale in accordance with a range of

the matching rate required for judgment.

The system returns to the screen to set the

mask region.

3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

12

Repeat steps 2 to 11 as needed and set

the mask region.

button.

The slider to set the upper limit and the lower

limit of the threshold will be displayed.

13 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

Area not be
masked
Masked area

The system returns to the screen to set the

[Window Shape] and [Mask].

4-46

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration
Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

4 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection

by checking the matching rate.

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Matching rate

Threshold (upper limit)

Threshold (lower limit)

yyJudged OK when the matching rate is within

threshold range, and NG when it is outside
the range.
yyIn accordance with status result of the tool,
the display color of the tool changes.
Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)
yyThe threshold can be changed using the
slider or by inputting values.
Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-14)
yyThe thresholds can also be set in [Limit
Adjustment] of the Sensor Setup Menu
screen.
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14)

5 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Color Area/Area tool settings.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-47

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Color Area/Area tool > Extended functions

4. Output Assignment

Position Adjustment tool

Extended functions

Extended functions of the Color Area/Area tool

Items

Description

Setting range
yyH (hue)
0 to 359
(both starting point
and ending point)

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

yyColor type
Advanced Color
Specifies a color to be extracted as HSB
Extraction
yyS (saturation)
(H: Hue, S: Saturation, B: Brightness).
(For color type)
0 to 255
Advanced Brightness
yyB (Brightness)
Extraction
0 to 255
(For monochrome type)
yyMonochrome type
Specifies brightness value to be
0 to 255
extracted.

to Live Image

A color/brightness range to be extracted

can be set on the Live image of the target.

Tool Name

An arbitrary name such as name of a

target can be set to tools. Tool names can
be checked on the run screen.
Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting (Page 5-1)

Up to 8 characters
in one byte English
characters can be set.

(None)

yyDisable
Matches the area
extracted from the
master image as the
criteria of a rate of
100%.
yyEnable: Large
Select a condition which the matching rate
Matches 1/10th of
the total sensor view
of the Color Area/Area is 100%.
as the criteria of a
rate of 100%.
yyEnable: Small
Matches 1/100th of
the total sensor view
as the criteria of a
rate of 100%.

Disable

Fixed Reference Area

4-48

Default
value

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool > Extended functions

Advanced Color Extraction/

Advanced Brightness Extraction

1 Display the extended functions menu of

the Color Area/Area tool.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

Position Adjustment tool

Extended functions

Tool Name

1 Display the extended functions menu of

the Color Area/Area tool.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

Tap the [Tool Name] button.

2 Tap the [Advanced Color Extraction] button. 2

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

For monochrome type, tap the [Advanced

Brightness Extraction] button.

The screen to set the tool name opens.

3 Specify a color or brightness of the

3 Input an arbitrary name.

extraction target.

For color type

zz

For details of how to enter characters, refer to

Inputting characters (Page 3-16).

For monochrome type

zz

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Color Area/Area tool settings.
The tool name which has been set will be displayed.

When the [to Live Image] button is tapped, the

color extraction condition can be checked with
the Live image.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Color Area/Area tool settings.

If the display language (Page 6-51) is changed,

characters might be garbled.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-49

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Color Area/Area tool > Extended functions

Position Adjustment tool

Extended functions

5 Extract the color/brightness range to be judged.

Fixed Reference Area

Extract from the Live image

zz

Select [Enable] if the color/brightness to be judged

in the master image cannot be detected.

4. Output Assignment

Tap the [Color Extraction]/[Brightness Extraction]

button.
By tapping the [to Live Image] button, extract the color/
brightness range to be judged from LIVE image.

The Color Area/Area tools with the fixed reference

area set as [Enable] are excluded from a Tool
Auto Tuning target.

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

1 Display the extended functions menu of

the Color Area/Area tool.

Display Method of Extended Functions

Menus (Page 4-66)

2 Tap the [Fixed Reference Area] button.

The color/brightness range to be extracted

can be specified by using [Advanced Color
Extraction]/[Advanced Brightness Extraction].

Extract from the master image, and then

zz
move the tool window

The Settings Navigator guide opens.

Tap the [OK] button.

3 Perform the Fixed Reference Area.

Tap the [Edit Window] button and move the tool

window.
By tapping the [Color Extraction]/[Brightness
Extraction] button, extract the color/brightness
range to be judged.
Tap the [Edit Window] button again, and move
the tool window to the position where the color/
brightness is to be judged.

Extract
the color/
brightness

4 Tap the [OK] button.

Move

6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the
Color Area/Area tool settings.

4-50

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration
Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

Position Adjustment tool

Extended functions

Position Adjustment tool

If there are varies of the position determining of the target, the position to be judged is also declined from
the tool window and cannot be judged correctly.
The amount that the target is off-centered in regards to the master image will be calculated by the internal
sensor and corrected by the position adjustment tool, so the off-centered position can be detected correctly
even if the position was off-centered.
Tool settings
Master image

Run
Position adjustment process

Position adjustment window

Tool window
Position adjustment window
Search region of the tool window

yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is being used, the processing time will be longer.
yyIn the case of the Outline tool, the search range position will be adjusted. The outline of a target is
searched in adjusted search range and the searched outline will be judged.
yyUsed when an area of the target to be examined and a relative position of the target are determined
and when there is variability in determining the position (position or angle) of a target. For example,
intended purposes are shown below.
- For package box, whether or not the seal is put in the determined area and direction.
- For components, whether logos/symbols/insignias are in-print or not.
yyIf the position adjustment fails, the result of position adjustment is NG. In this case, the total status
result is NG. The individually set detection tool will not be judged. Failure of position adjustment can
be checked with position adjustment output. Review the position adjustment settings and position
determining accuracy for a target.
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)
yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is added, the following settings for the detection tools have been set
will be changed.
- Outline tool : When the search region is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the default
value in which the position adjustment is enabled.
- Color Area/Area tool : When the window shape is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the
default value in which the position adjustment is enabled.
yyOnly one Position Adjustment tool can be set in one program. By setting the position adjustment, the
position adjustment will be applied to all detection tools.
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment
yyFor details of matching rate, refer to
Tool (Page A-5).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-51

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Tool window

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment

Extended functions

Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool

Items

Setting range

Window Shape

yy Rect
Specifies with the rectangular window.
An arbitrary size, position, and angle
Select a shape of the window
can be specified with stylus.
to specify the range of a target
to be position adjustment
yy Circle
Specifies with the circular window.
reference.
An arbitrary size and position can be
specified with stylus.

Search Region

Specifies an area to search

yyEntire
a target to be a reference
Specifies the entire imaging area as a
of position adjustment. By
search region.
specifying the narrower area as yyPartial
a search region, the processing
Specifies a search region to an arbitrary
time will be shortened.
size in the imaging area.

Remove Outline

yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
You can undo back to 5 operations before.
yyClear
Initializes all the disabling processes.
yyEraser Width
Selects the eraser width (light/medium/
heavy) of the pen when specifying an
unnecessary outline.

Sensitivity

Fine Tune Outline

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Edit Window

Description

Limit
Adjustment

Rect

Entire

Unnecessary outlines which

obstruct the steady position
adjustments can be disabled.
Specifies by tracing the
extracted outline with stylus.

Not specified

The extraction sensitivity of

an outline can be selected
according to the target.

yyHigh
Extracts an outline of the image with
low contrast. Used when an outline you
wish to detect cannot be extracted.
yyNorm
Extracts the standard outline.
yyLow
Reduces the extracted volume of an
outline. Reduces the extracted volume
of an outline that is not necessary to
detect.

Norm

Adjusts a threshold (matching

rate*) which judges whether
the position adjustment is
succeeded or failed. During
threshold adjustment, the
0 to 100
system switches to the Test
mode so that the threshold can
be adjusted to an applicable
value during an operation.

* 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.

Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of non-matched parts.
4-52

Default value

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

70

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration
Color Area/Area tool

Setting the Position Adjustment tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

6 Select a tool window shape.

1 Start the Settings Navigator.

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)

2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings.

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow
(Page 4-4)

Circle

[Pos.Adj.] button.

Adding a tool (Page 4-31)

The main screen for the Position Adjustment tool
settings opens.

4 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

7 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the screen to set the

[Window Shape] and [Search Region].

8 Set the position, size, and angle of tool

window in accordance with a target.

Set the tool

window

The screen to set the [Window Shape] and

[Search Region] opens.
yyOnce the tool window is tapped, you can
proceed to step 8.
yyBy tapping the < > extended functions display
button, the extended functions menu for the
position adjustment tool will be displayed.
Extended functions for the Position
Adjustment tool (Page 4-57)

5 Tap the [Window Shape] button.

Set the position and size of tool window as

large as possible by selecting the part that is
dissimilar in shape.
Stabilizing the position adjustment (Page 5-37)
For details of editing the tool window, refer to
Editing the tool window (Page 3-15).

9 Set a search region as needed.

Setting a search region (Page 4-55)

10 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The screen to select the window shape opens.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Position Adjustment tool settings.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-53

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

3 Tap the [Add Tool] button and then the

Rect

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

11 Adjust the outline as needed.

Settings for disabling outlines (Page 4-55)

Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-56)

4. Output Assignment

Extended functions

14 Adjust a threshold to judge whether or not

the position adjustment is succeeded by
checking the matching rate.

12 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Matching rate

The sensor turns to the Test mode.

13 Image the target.

If the target is to be imaged using an external

trigger, input the external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by

inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging

by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the
button.

Threshold

yyIf there are many variations of target shapes

that a tool window has been set to, set the
threshold to a lower matching rate.
yyA target is detected as OK if the matching
rate is greater than the threshold, and
detected as NG if the matching rate is lower
than the threshold.
yyIn accordance with status result of the tool,
the display color of the tool changes.
Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)
yyThe threshold can be changed using the
slider or by inputting values.
Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-14)
yyThe threshold can also be set in [Limit Adjustment]
of the sensor setting menu screen.
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14)

15 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Position Adjustment tool settings.

16 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for tool

settings.

4-54

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration
Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

Setting a search region

Settings for disabling outlines

To limit a range (adjusting range of position

adjustment) to search a target to be a reference,
set it in the search region setting. When a range
of the search region is to be specified, perform the
following procedures.

Perform the following procedures to delete an

unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window.

1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.

1 Tap the [Search Region] button.

The selection screen for a search region opens.

2 Tap the [Partial] button.

2 Specify the unnecessary outline in basic

shapes of position adjustment by tracing

it with stylus.
The specified outline changes from green to
yellow.

The editing screen for a search region opens.

3 Set the tool window indicates a search region.

Search region

yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to

Editing the tool window (Page 3-15).
yyThe search region cannot be rotated.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

The outline that the

outline extraction
has disabled
(yellow)

yyThe eraser width (light/medium/heavy) of the

pen when tracing an outline can be switched
via [Eraser Width].
yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 5 times.

3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Position Adjustment tool settings.

button.

The system returns to the screen to set [Window

Shape] and [Search Region].
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-55

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

The Settings Navigator guide opens.

Tap the [OK] button.

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment

Extended functions

Setting a sensitivity

According to the target, perform the following

procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an
outline is selected.

1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

The outline
cannot be
extracted

The Settings Navigator guide opens.

Tap the [OK] button.

2 Select the extraction sensitivity of an outline.

Select [High] in this section.

3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

Extracted
outline

The system returns to the main screen for the

Position Adjustment tool settings.

4-56

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

Color Area/Area tool

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool > Extended functions

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

Extended functions for the Position Adjustment tool

Items

Rotation
Range

Default
value

Setting range

Sets a range to adjust the position to the rotating direction.

The status result of position adjustment is NG without adjusting
the position if an angle of a target exceeds its rotation range.
0 to 180
yyIf the setting of rotation range is too wide, the acceptable range
of variation in angles when a target is placed can be set wider. (Unit: 1)
yyIf the setting of rotation range is too narrow, the
processing time can be shorten.

Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited

angle set in Rotation Range.

20

yyON
The tool window will
search with the range
few degrees wider
than the setting value
of rotation range.
yyOFF
The tool window will
search only within the
set rotation range.

ON

Rotation Range

1 Display the extended functions menu for

the Position Adjustment tool.

4 Set a margin of the rotation range.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button.

3 Set the rotation range of the Position

Adjustment tool.

yySelect [ON] when the position adjustment

is not stable because of the influence of the
rotation angle of the target.
The tool window will search with the range
few degrees wider than the setting value of
rotation range.
(The tool window will search few degrees
even if the rotation range is set to 0.)
yySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect
the target in accordance with the set rotation
angle of the target.

5 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Position Adjustment tool settings.
For details of settings by the slider or inputting
value, refer to
Editing the value with the
slider (Page 3-14).
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-57

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Margin

Description

1. Image Optimization
Outline tool

2. Master Registration

Color Area/Area tool

3. Tool Settings

Position Adjustment tool

4. Output Assignment

Extended functions

Extended functions for the Tool settings

Items of extended functions for the Tool settings
Items

Copy Tool

Description

Setting range

Default
value

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Copies a tool which has been set, and pastes it to the

same position.
This is for outline tool and color area/area tool.

Copy Tool
This section explains using example of the Outline tool.

1 Select the copy source tool.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

Select the copy
source tool.

2 Display the extended functions menu for

the Tool settings.

The copied tool window with the selected status

will be displayed in the copy source tool window.
Name of copied tool

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

(Page 4-66)

3 Tap the [Copy Tool] button.

Copied tool

The tool number which has not been set

will be automatically assigned to the copy
destination tool number.

The confirmation dialog appears.

If 16 tools are set, tools cannot be copied.

5 Tap the [Edit Tool] button and set the copied

tool.

3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment

Method for Targets) (Page 4-28)

4-58

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

MEMO

4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

4-59

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

4. Output Assignment
(Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)
Set the output items to be assigned to the output
line (OUT1 to OUT4).
Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor
(Page 2-12)
Chapter 7 Controlling with Input/Output Line
(Page 7-1)

Main screen for the Output

Assignment

Setting range of the Output

Assignment
Setting
range

Description

OFF

Do not output.
Output function will be constantly OFF.

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

When the total status result of the

tools which have been set was OK,
the output function turns ON.
Total Status
The condition of the total status can
be selected from [All Tools OK] /
[Any Tool OK] / [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].

(1)

(2)

Tot.
StatusNG

(3)

RUN

When the sensor is running with no

system error occurred, the output
function turns ON.

BUSY

The output function turns ON when

the system is in a state that cannot
input additional trigger; such as
during imaging, judging processing,
switching programs, and registering
external master images.

Error

The output function turns ON

when an error has occurred; such
as system error, memory readout
error for startup, external master
registration error, trigger error (when
the trigger settings are enabled).

Pos. Adj.

When position adjustment processing

is finished normally, the output function
turns ON.

Tool 01 to 16

When the status result of specified

tool is OK, the output function turns
ON. Status results can be output for
each tool.

Logic 1 to 4

When the status result of specified logic

is OK, the output function turns ON.

(4)
(5)

(1) [Back] button

Returns to the Tool settings screen.
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment
Method for Targets) (Page 4-28)
(2) Output assignment button
Assigns the output item to each output line.
(3) [ON]/[OFF] button for the trigger error output
Select whether to enable/disable the output
when the trigger error occurred.
Error Messages (Page A-22)
(4) [Complete] button
Finishes the Settings Navigator.
Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5)
(5) Extended functions display button
Displays the extended functions menu for the
Output Assignment.
Display Method of Extended Functions
Menus (Page 4-66)

When the total status result was

NG, the output function turns ON.

Default value

OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
Trigger Error

:Total Status (N.O.)

:BUSY (N.O.)
:Error (N.C.)
:OFF
:OFF

yyN.O./N.C. can be changed.

Output Settings (Page 6-27)
yyThe input cable assignment can be changed.
Input Settings (Page 6-26)
4-60

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings
Output Assignment

4. Output Assignment
Extended functions

Setting the Output Assignment

1 Start the Settings Navigator.

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)

2 Display the main screen for the Output

Assignment.

 Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

(Page 4-4)

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

3 Tap the item name of output line to perform

output assignment and select the output item.

4 Finish the Settings Navigator.

Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-61

1. Image Optimization
Output Assignment

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

Extended functions

Extended functions for the Output Assignment

Extended functions items for the Output Assignment
Items

Description

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Logic

Total Status
Conditions

4-62

Default
value

Assigns the logical operation

results of each detection tool to
the output function.
Up to 4 items, Logic 1 to 4, can
be defined.

yyUnused
The selected items are not used in
a logical formula.
yyUsed
When the status results of the
selected items were OK, the total
status output function turns ON.
yyUsed (Inverse)
When the status results of the
selected items were NG, the total
status output function turns ON.

Unused

Selects the logical operation

method of logics.

yyAND
Calculates the logical multiply
(AND) of all selected items.
yyOR
Calculates the logical sum (OR) of
all selected items.

AND

Selects a condition for the total

status result. The total status
result is displayed in accordance
with the selected condition.

yyAll Tools OK
When all of the status results of the
detection tools was OK, the total
status output function turns ON.
yyAny Tools OK
When any of the status results of
All Tools OK
the detection tools was OK, the total
status output function turns ON.
yyLogic 1 to 4
When the status result of the set
logic was OK, the total status
output function turns ON.

4
Logic Settings

Setting range

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

4. Output Assignment

Output Assignment

Logic Settings

1 Display the extended functions menu for

Extended functions

5 Select items to be integrated into the logic.

the Output Assignment.

Display Method of Extended Functions

Menus (Page 4-66)

2 Tap the [Logic Settings] button.

The Logic Settings screen opens.

3 Tap the number which the logic judgement

condition is to be defined.

The status result of the logic is calculated from

OK/NG of all of the items which [Used] or [Used
(Inverse)] has been set.

Logic : AND
zz
Tool A
Tool B
Tool C
(Inverse)

Logic 1 to 4

Image of logic output when the Logic

is [AND]

When an undefined detection tool has been

defined to a logic, [An undefined tool is selected.]
is displayed on the right side of the logic number.

4 Select the logical operation method of the logic.

Tool A

Tool B

Tool C

Logic

OK

OK

OK

NG

NG

OK

OK

NG

OK

NG

OK

NG

NG

NG

OK

NG

OK

OK

NG

OK

NG

OK

NG

NG

OK

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

NG

yyWhen [AND] has been selected, the logic

output is the logical multiply (AND) of the
status results of each selected item.
yyWhen [OR] has been selected, the logic
output is the logical sum (OR) of the status
results of each selected item.
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-63

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Red checks are displayed at the items which

"Used" is selected.
Blue checks are displayed at the items which
"Used (Inverst)" is selected.

1. Image Optimization
Output Assignment

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings

Extended functions

6 When the setting is completed, tap the

Logic : OR
zz

[OK] button.

Tool A
Tool B
Tool C
(Inverse)

Logic 1 to 4

The system returns to the Logic Settings screen.

7 Tap the [Close] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Outline tool settings.

Image of logic output when the Logic

is [OR]

4. Output Assignment

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Tool A

Tool B

Tool C

Logic

OK

OK

OK

OK

NG

OK

OK

OK

OK

NG

OK

OK

NG

NG

OK

NG

OK

OK

NG

OK

NG

OK

NG

OK

OK

NG

NG

OK

NG

NG

NG

OK

yySelect either [Unused]/[Used]/[Used

(Inverse)] for each item (Position Adjustment/
Tool 01 to Tool 16/Logic 1 to Logic 4).
yyWhen the status results of the [Used] items
were OK, the status output function for items
in the logic turns ON.
yyWhen the status results of the [Used
(Inverse)] items were NG, the status output
function for items in the logic turns ON.
yyTo define a logic which has been set to
another logic, use the logic number which
is greater than the logic number which has
been set.
For example, use either of Logic 2 to Logic 4
in case of defining Logic 1 to another logic.
When the program number has been changed
and you went to [Run] from [Program] after
the power ON, the judgement is not done if no
trigger input. The judgement output of each
tool is OFF.

4-64

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1. Image Optimization

2. Master Registration

3. Tool Settings
Output Assignment

Total Status Conditions

Extended functions

Any Tools OK
zz

Display the extended functions menu for

the Output Assignment.
Display Method of Extended Functions
Menus (Page 4-66)

4. Output Assignment

Tap the [Total Status Conditions] button.

When any of the detection tools was OK, the

total status output function turns ON.
Tool A
Tool B

OK
NG
OK
NG

Image of total status output when the total

status condition is [Any Tools OK]

3 Select a total status condition.

For [Any Tools OK], the status result of the

position adjustment is not included in the total
status conditions.

Logic 1 to 4
zz
When the status result of the defined logic was
OK, the total status output function turns ON.
Logic OK
1 to 4 NG
Total OK
Status NG

The total status result is displayed in

accordance with the selected condition.

Image of total status output when the total

status condition is [Logic 1 to 4]

All Tools OK
zz
When all of the detection tools were OK, the
total status output function turns ON.
Tool A
Tool B

OK
NG
OK
NG

yyWhen the position adjustment failed, the

status result of each tool is NG.
yyIf the Area tool window is protruded from
the imaging area when position adjustment
succeeded, the tool cannot be judged and
the status result is NG.

4 When the setting is completed, tap the

Total OK
Status NG

[OK] button.

Image of total status output when the total

status condition is [All Tools OK]

The system returns to the main screen for the

Outline tool settings.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-65

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Total OK
Status NG

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus

In each setting for Settings Navigator, the extended

functions menu will be displayed by tapping the < >
extended functions display button at the lower left on
the screen.
This section explains how to display the extended
functions menu using an example of the Image
Optimization screen.
For details of extended functions menu, refer to
details in each step.

Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

1 Start the Settings Navigator.

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)

2 Display the main screen for the Image

Optimization.

 Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

(Page 4-4)

3 Tap the <

> extended functions display

button at the lower left of the window.

The extended functions menu will be displayed.

Tap the arbitrary button and set the extended

functions menu.
The extended functions menu will be hidden
by tapping the < > button.

4-66

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5


Operating/Adjusting

This chapter explains the procedures for starting

the operation, the names and functions of each part
and the adjustment procedures to fully utilize the
judgment ability of the IV Series.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-1

5
Operating/Adjusting

Starting an Operation.........................................5-2
Overview of the Operation Screen....................5-3
Names and Functions of
the Operation Screen.........................................5-4
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment...............5-14
Tool Auto Tuning ( Automatically
Adjusting the Judgment Condition)...............5-15
Stabilizing the Judgment Process..................5-32
Shortening the Processing Time....................5-40

Starting an Operation

Starting an Operation
Starts an operation in accordance with the program created with the Settings Navigator.
The sensor can be independently operated.

Turning on the power and starting

an operation

Exiting the sensor settings and

starting an operation

1 Turn on the power of the sensor and monitor. 1 Exit the settings of the sensor, such as
Settings Navigator.
2 Confirm that the operation screen opens.
Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5)
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

Operating/Adjusting

2 Tap the [RUN] button.

If the image or status result does not update,

refer to
Troubleshooting (Page A-19).
The run screen opens and the operation starts.
When the power of the monitor is turned on for
the first time, the initial settings screen opens.
Operation when the Power is Turned on
(Page 3-5)

5-2

If the image or status result does not update,

refer to
Troubleshooting (Page A-19).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Overview of the Operation Screen

Overview of the Operation Screen

Start screen
Menu OFF (Page 5-4)

Menu ON (Page 5-4)

(Page 5-5)
Hides the title and menu button, and displays
the entire image.
Changes the display magnification of an
image.

Display setting screen

Selects the [Tool View] and [Analysis] menu,
and set the information to display on the
monitor.

Statistics display screen

Histogram display screen

(Page 5-10)

(Page 5-12)

Displays the statistical

information of the status result.

Displays the histogram of the

status result.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Selecting the display

method of the tool.
(Page 5-7)

5-3

Operating/Adjusting

Zoom/Full-screen mode

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

In the operation screen, the displayed items will be different depending on the ON/OFF of the menus.

Menu Screen
Menu OFF
zz

(8)

(1)
(2)

(10)
(11)

(3)

Menu ON
zz

(9)

(9)

(8)

(1)
(2)

(10)
(11)

(3)

(4)

(4)

(5)

(5)

(12)
(13)
(14)

Operating/Adjusting

(7)
(6)
(15)

(1) Title
Displays the device name (Page 6-29), program
number (Page 6-7), and program name of the
sensor (Page 6-12).
(2) Tool Name
Displays the tool number and tool name of the
tool selected on the monitor (Page 4-30).
The selected tool can also be switched.
(3) Brightness correction region
When the brightness correction is being set, the
brightness correction region will be displayed
with a blue frame.
(4) Tool window
Displays the tool region which has been set with
green frame when the status result is OK, and
displays with red frame when the status result is
NG.
The tool selected by tapping the region can also
be switched.
Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)
(5) Search region
If the search region of the selected tool is being
set to partial, the search region will be displayed
with a light blue frame. If the position adjustment
is being set, the search region after the position
adjustment will be displayed.
(6) [Menu] button
Switches to the display in Menu ON mode.
When the touch panel is locked, the
will
be displayed.
Touch Screen Lock (Page 6-50)
5-4

(16)

(17)

(18)

(7) [OFF] button

Switches to the display in Menu OFF mode.
(8) Status gauge
Displays status results (OK/NG) of the tool
selected on the monitor, a line indicating the
threshold, and a value of the matching rate.
When the status gauge is tapped, the operation
turns to Threshold Adjustment mode (Page 5-14).
Judge is OK (green)

Threshold

Judge is NG (red)

Matching rate

For details of the status results, refer to

Displaying and outputting the status result
(Page A-4).
(9) OK/NG display
Displays the total status result.
yyIf the total status result is OK, OK will be
displayed. The total status conditions can be
selected from [All Tools OK]/[Any Tool OK]/
[Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
yyIf the total status result is NG, NG will be
displayed.
(10) Processing time
Displays the time from receiving an external
trigger or an internal trigger to output the status
result. In the case of the One-Shot output (Page
6-27), the ON-Delay Time is not included.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

(11) Condition Display

Displays the Condition of the monitor.
......... Indicates Running.
......... Indicates Test mode. The status
result will not be output.
(12) [Trig] button
Displayed when an external trigger is set. A trigger
is issued by each tap on a button. This button is
used when the external trigger cannot be input.
The button can be set to be displayed or hidden.
Display Settings (Page 6-49)

When the [Zoom] button displayed in the Menu ON

screen is tapped, the title and menus displayed on
the monitor become hidden and the display will be
switched to the full-screen mode.

1 Tap the [Zoom] button.

If the [Zoom] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu]
button at the lower left corner of the screen.

(14) [View] button

Displays the menu to select display methods for
the tools and analysis screen.
Selecting a display method for tools
(Page 5-7)
(15) [Monitor Settings] button
Displays the Monitor Settings screen.
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information
(Page 6-45)

5
Operating/Adjusting

(13) [Zoom] button

Switches the display in full-screen mode and makes
it possible to enlarge the images on the monitor.
Switching the display to the full-screen mode
(Page 5-5)

Switching the display to the fullscreen mode

Switches to the full-screen mode.

(16) [Sensor Image History] button

Displays the Sensor Image History screen.
Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-14)
(17) [USB Memory] button
Displays the USB Memory screen.
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to
a USB Memory (Page 6-18)
(18) [Sensor Setup] button
Stops the running mode to display the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
If the password lock has been set to the sensor,
will be displayed.
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen
(Page 6-7)
Password Lock (Page 6-30)
When [OFF] is selected in the display method of
the tool (Page 5-7), the tool name, search region,
tool window, and status gauge will be hidden.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-5

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Enlarging the image display

In the full-screen mode, the display magnification of
images can be changed.

1 Switch the display to the full-screen mode.

Switching the display to the full-screen
mode (Page 5-5)

2 Change the magnification ratio to the desired

ratio by tapping the

or

button.

Selecting the tool whose

information to be displayed
There are two methods for selecting the tool, whose
information you wish to display; (1) selecting the tool
from the pull-down menu and (2) tapping the tool
window on the monitor

Selecting the tool from the pull-down menu

1 Select the tool whose information you

wish to display from the pull-down menu

by tapping the tool name.

Operating/Adjusting

Select the tool

Move button

Information of the selected tool will be displayed.

yyThe selectable ratios are 1.0x/1.5x/2.0x/3.0x.
yyThe display is enlarged each time you tap on
the [+] button.
yyThe display is reduced each time you tap on
the [-] button.
yyIn the enlarged display, the enlarged area
currently displayed is indicated at the left of
the [Back] button.
Enlarged area currently
displayed
Entire image

yyIf the [Back] button is tapped while the

image is enlarged, the screen returns to the
Menu ON screen maintaining the current
magnification ratio.

Information of
the selected tool

Selected tool

Selecting the tool by tapping it on the monitor

1 Tap the tool window of the tool whose

information you wish to display.

Selected tool

3 Adjust the display position of the enlarged

image as needed.

Tap the tool

yyYou can change the display position of the

enlarged image by tapping the move button or
swiping the image on the monitor.
yyIf you tap the [+] or [-] button after changing
the display position, the image will be
enlarged/reduced with reference to the
center of the image displayed on the monitor.

Information of the tapped tool will be displayed.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the

[Back] button.

5-6

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Information of
the tapped tool

tapped tool

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Selecting a display method for tools

When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON
screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are
displayed.
If one of the display methods for [Tool View] is selected
and the [OK] button is tapped, the display on the
monitor changes in accordance with the selected
display method.

Display methods for tools

Depending on the type of the sensor (color or
monochrome type), selectable display methods are
different.

For color type

OFF
zz

1 Tap the [View] button.

The tool windows and search regions of all tools

become hidden. The tool name and the status
gauge will also be hidden.

Window
zz

The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are

displayed.

2 Tap the display method for [Tool View] in

accordance with the intended purpose.

Selected tool
yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a
thick line. If the mask region is set to the Color
Area tool, the region that the tool window and
mask region are combined will be displayed.
yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light
blue.
For details of the display methods for [Tool View],
refer to
Display methods for tools (Page 5-7).

3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The display method for tools changes in

accordance with the selected menu.

Non selected tools

yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a
thin line.
yyThe search region and the mask region will not
be displayed.
Common
When the result of position adjustment and the
status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be
displayed in green. If one of the status results is
NG, the tool will be displayed in red.
Displays the brightness correction window in blue.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-7

Operating/Adjusting

If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu]

button at the lower left corner of the monitor.

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

For monochrome type

Process 1
zz

OFF
zz
Outside the tool
window
Inside the tool
window

Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the

following are different. The rest are the same.

Operating/Adjusting

Selected tool
yyOutline tool
Displays inside the tool window in
monochrome, and outside of the tool window
in color. Indicates the recognized outline with
a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG).
If the brightness correction has been set, the
inside the tool window is displayed with the
corrected brightness.
yyColor Area tool
Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or
red (NG).

Process 2
zz

Outside the
search region
Inside the
search region

Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected,

the following are different. The rest are the same.
Selected tool
yyOutline tool
Displays inside the tool window and search
region in monochrome, and outside of the
search region in color.
If the brightness correction has been set,
inside the search region is displayed with the
corrected brightness.
yyColor Area tool
Displays inside the tool window in
monochrome. The extracted region is
displayed in the color of the target.

5-8

The tool windows and search regions of all tools

become hidden. The tool name and the status
gauge will also be hidden.

Window
zz

Selected tool
yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a
thick line. If the mask region is set to the Area
tool, the region that the tool window and mask
region are combined will be displayed.
yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light
blue.
Non selected tools
yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a
thin line.
yyThe search region and the mask region will not
be displayed.
Common
When the result of position adjustment and the
status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be
displayed in green. If one of the status results is
NG, the tool will be displayed in red.
Displays the brightness correction window in blue.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Process
zz

Process 2
zz

Outside the
search region
Inside the
search region

Selected tool
yyOutline tool
Indicates the recognized outline with a series
of points in green (OK) or red (NG).
yyArea tool
Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or
red (NG).
If the brightness correction has been set, the
inside the tool window will be displayed with
the corrected brightness and outside the tool
window will be displayed with the brightness
before correction.

This is selectable for the Outline tool for which

[Brightness Correction] has been set.
Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected,
the following are different. The rest are the same.
Selected tool
Displays inside the search region with the
corrected brightness and outside the search
region with the brightness before correction.

Process 1
zz

Outside the tool

window
Inside the tool
window

This is selectable for the Outline tool for which

[Brightness Correction] has been set.
Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the
following are different. The rest are the same.
Selected tool
Indicates the recognized outline with a series of
points in green (OK) or red (NG).
Displays inside the tool window with the
corrected brightness and outside the tool
window with the brightness before correction.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-9

5
Operating/Adjusting

This is selectable for the Area tool and for the

Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has
not been set.
Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the
following are different. The rest are the same.

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Contents of the statistical information are as

follows.

Displaying the statistical

information
When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON
screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are
displayed.
If the [Statistics] button in the [Analysis] is selected,
the statistical information of judgment is displayed.

Displaying the statistical information

Operating/Adjusting

1 Tap the [View] button.

If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu]
button at the lower left corner of the monitor.

(1)
(2)
(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(1) Title
Displays the name of the sensor (Page 6-29),
program number (Page 6-7), and program
name (Page 6-12).
(2) Position adjustment status result
When the position adjustment is being set, the
position adjustment status result of the latest
judgment process will be displayed.
(3) Tool status result
Displays the status result of the latest judgment
process for each tool set in the program.

The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be

displayed.

2 Tap the [Statistics] button.

The statistical information will be displayed.

5-10

(4) [Reset] button

Resets the statistical information and the histograms.
(5) Processing time information
Displays information related to the processing
time.
yyTIME............ Displays the processing time of
the latest judgment process.
yyMAX............. Displays the maximum value of
the processing time.
yyMIN.............. Displays the minimum value of
the processing time.
yyAVE.............. Displays the average value of
the processing time.
(6) Trigger count information
Displays the information related to the number
of triggers.
yyTrigNo.......... Displays the total number of
triggers issued. This number
does not include the number of
trigger errors.
yyOK................ Displays the number of triggers
issued with the total status OK.
yyNG................ Displays the number of triggers
issued with the total status NG.
yyTrigErrNo...... Displays the number of triggers
issued as error triggers.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

(7) OUT information

Displays the latest status results of items which
are assigned to an output line (OUT1 to OUT4)
(Page 4-60).

3 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Menu ON screen.

1 Tap the [View] button.

If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the
[Menu] button at the lower left corner of the
monitor.
The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be
displayed.

2 Tap the [OFF] button in the [Analysis].

5
Operating/Adjusting

yyThe upper limit of TrigNo is 999999. When

the number exceeds the upper limit, the
counter resets to 0 and starts counting
again.
yyThe upper limit of OK, NG, and TrigErrNo is
999999. The values display stops updating
when the upper limit is reached.
yyThe statistical information is reset under the
following conditions.
- When the [Reset] button is tapped
- When the power of the sensor is turned OFF
- When the tool is added/deleted/copied
- When the upper limit of the Color Area/
Area tool is enabled/disabled or when
the setting scale is changed by the user
operation or Tool Auto Tuning
- When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if
more than two tools other than the position
adjustment tool are being set
- When the program is switched
- When each correction of the setup
adjustment is started
- When the sensor is initialized

Hiding the statistical information

The statistical information becomes hidden.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Menu ON screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-11

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Contents of the histogram are as follows.

Displaying the histogram

When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON
screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are
displayed.
If the [Histogram] button in the [Analysis] is
selected, the matching rate of the selected tool is
displayed as a histogram.

Displaying the histogram

Operating/Adjusting

If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the

[Menu] button at the lower left corner of the
monitor.

The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be

displayed.

The histogram appears.

(6)

(2)
(3)

(7)
(8)

(4)
(5)

(1) Title
Displays the name of the sensor (Page 6-29),
program number (Page 6-7), and program
name (Page 6-12).

1 Tap the [View] button.

2 Tap the [Histogram] button.

(1)

(2) Tool Name

Displays the name of the tool whose histogram
is been shown. Tap the tool name to select the
tool whose histogram is you wish to display.
(3) Matching rate information
Displays the information related to the matching
rate.
yyMatch..........Displays the matching rate of the
latest judgment process.
yyMAX............Displays the maximum value of
the matching rate.
yyMIN.............Displays the minimum value of
the matching rate.
yyAVE.............Displays the average value of the
matching rate.
(4) Judgment Record
Displays the judgment process counts for OK or NG.
yyOK...............Displays the process count for "OK".
yyNG...............Displays the process count for "NG".
If the judgment threshold is changed, the
histogram is updated according to the result
judged based on the changed threshold.
However, the judgment record retains the
counts judged based on the previous threshold.
Therefore, the judgment conditions on the
histogram may be different from the displayed
judgment record counts.
(5) [Reset] button
Resets the statistical information and the histograms.
(6) Tool status result
Displays the status results for the selected tool
as OK, NG, or -- (Pos.Adj. fails).

5-12

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

(7) Threshold
Displays the threshold for the selected tool.

yyThe upper limit of the judgment processing

count display for the judgment record is
999999. The values display stop updating
when the upper limit is reached.
yyThe upper limit of the histogram is 999999.
The values display stop updating when the
upper limit is reached.
yyThe histogram and judgement records are
reset under the following conditions.
- When the [Reset] button is tapped
- When the power of the sensor is turned OFF
- When the tool is added/deleted/copied
- When the upper limit of the Color Area/
Area tool is enabled/disabled or when
the setting scale is changed by the user
operation or Tool Auto Tuning
- When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if
more than two tools other than the position
adjustment tool are being set
- When the program is switched
- When each correction of the setup
adjustment is started
- When the sensor is initialized

1 Tap the [View] button.

If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the
[Menu] button at the lower left corner of the
monitor.
The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be
displayed.

2 Tap the [OFF] button in the [Analysis].

5
Operating/Adjusting

(8) Histogram
Displays the histogram (frequency distribution)
for the selected tool.
The range for OK is displayed in green and for
NG is displayed in red, having the threshold as
the boundary.
yyAbscissa axis....Displays the distribution of the
matching rate. The display of
the range is fixed and cannot
be specified arbitrary.
yyVertical axis.......Adjusts automatically in
accordance with the maximum
value of the frequency. It
cannot be specified arbitrary.
yy .....................Displays the matching rate of
the latest judgment process.

Hiding the histogram

The histogram becomes hidden.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Menu ON screen.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Menu ON screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-13

Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

The method for manually adjusting the threshold
while in the Test mode.
The threshold adjustment can be started by the
[Limit Adjustment] button in the tool settings of the
Settings Navigator.

5 Adjust the threshold by checking the

matching rate.

<Setting example>
If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is
higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the lowquality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to
65 of the value intermediate between 40 and 90.

1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

(Page 6-7)

2 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.

Operating/Adjusting

Matching rate

The [Limit Adjustment] button is available only when

the program that the tool has been set is selected.

3 If multiple tools are set in the program, select

the tool to adjust the threshold from the pulldown menu and tap the [OK] button.
Select the tool

The sensor turns to the Test mode.

4 Image a high or low-quality-target to be

the reference of judgment.

If the target is to be imaged using an external

trigger, input the external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the
button (Page 4-7) to image the target
by inputting an internal trigger temporarily.
Imaging by inputting an internal trigger finishes
by the
5-14

button.

Threshold

yyA target is detected as OK if the matching

rate is greater than the threshold, and
detected as NG if the matching rate is lower
than the threshold.
yyIn accordance with the status result of the
tool, the display color of the tool changes.
Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)
yyThe threshold can be changed by using the
slider or inputting values.
Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-14)
yyA target is judged by the new threshold from
the judgment process of the trigger output
after the threshold is changed.
yyThe threshold can be adjusted by checking
the histogram result.
Displaying the histogram (Page 5-12)
The displayed contents are as follows.
- The histogram before threshold adjustment
is displayed.
- The status results during threshold
adjustment are not added to the frequency
distribution of the histogram.
- The counts for OK and NG are not displayed.
- The reset button is not displayed.

6 After the adjustment is completed, tap the

[OK] button.

The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

If a program is set with more than one tool, a
confirmation dialog for whether or not to adjust
threshold for other tools is displayed.
To adjust threshold for other tools, tap the [Yes]
button and repeat steps 3 to 6.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

Tool Auto Tuning

(Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)
The Tool Auto Tuning is a function to automatically
adjust the judgment condition for the detection tool
and the judgment threshold for each tool by using
multiple high-quality-targets (OK images) and lowquality-targets (NG images).
There are three methods to register the image to
be used for Tool Auto Tuning.

Using the image history saved in the

sensor

This is the method to register the image as an OK

or an NG image to perform tuning while checking
the images read from the Sensor Image History.
Sensor Image History ( Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-14)

Using the images taken in the Test

mode

Sensor Image History

Perform tuning by reading the

images judged as OK or NG
from the Sensor Image History

Using the image files saved in the

USB memory

This is the method to register the image as

an OK or an NG image to perform tuning
while checking the images read from the USB
memory. Batch backup files (*.iva) and image
capture files (*.ivp) can be used.
Backing up in a batch (Page 6-19)
Capturing the screen (Page 6-23)
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG

Perform tuning by
imaging targets which
are judged as OK or NG

USB
memory
Batch backup file (*.iva)
Image capture file (*.ivp)

Perform tuning by reading the images judged as OK

or NG from the USB memory

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-15

Operating/Adjusting

This is the method to register the image as an

OK or an NG image to perform tuning while
preparing the multiple high and low-qualitytarget and checking the results of the test
operation.

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

Operation flow for the Tool Auto

Tuning

Displays the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning from

the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Start

yyThe position adjustment tool is not a target for

Tool Auto Tuning.
yyThe Color Area/Area tools with the [Fixed
Reference Area] set as [Enable] are excluded
from a Tool Auto Tuning target.

Select
the tool

1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Operating/Adjusting

Select a starting
method

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

(Page 6-7)

2 Tap the [Tool Auto Tuning] button.

Image a target

Judgment of an
image?

Starting and finishing the Tool Auto

Tuning

Low-quality

High-quality
When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen
opens, tap the [Start] button.
AutoTune as
OK

AutoTune as
NG

3 If multiple tools are set in the program,

select the target tool for Tool Auto Tuning

from the pull-down menu, and tap the [OK]
button.

Automatically adjust the judgment

condition and threshold

Yes

Select the tool

Add image?*
The Start Up Menu screen for Tool Auto Tuning
opens.

No

Finish
* There are three methods to prepare images.
* Up to 24 images can be used for tuning.
5-16

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

Use the registered information file

4 Select a starting method of Tool Auto Tuning. zz

Register from the beginning

zz

5 Select the registration source of the image

to be registered to the Tool Auto Tuning
and register the image.

If the previous registration information has been

saved in the monitor, a confirmation dialog
asking whether or not to discard the previous
registration information appears.

For registration of an image taken during

zz
the Test mode

Registering the images taken in the Test

mode (Page 5-18)

For registration of an image history saved

zz
yyTap the [OK] button if you wish to discard the
previous registration information and perform
Tool Auto Tuning.
yyBy tapping the [Saving to the USB memory]
button, the result of Tool Auto Tuning can be
saved in the USB memory as a registration
information and can be reused.

in the sensor

Registering the images from the image

history saved in the sensor (Page 5-20)

For registration of an image file saved in

zz
USB memory

Registering the images from the file saved

in the USB memory (Page 5-22)

Use the previous registered image

zz
Select this method in the following cases.
yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning after
additionally adding a new image to the OK/NG
image registered in the previous Tool Auto Tuning
yyWhen readjusting the tool settings after Tool
Auto Tuning and then repeating the Tool Auto
Tuning by the registered image.
Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration
information (Page 5-26)
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-17

5
Operating/Adjusting

Select this method in the following cases.

yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning for the first
time.
yyWhen redoing the image registration from the
beginning.
If the [Register from the beginning] is tapped,
the registration menu screen of Tool Auto
Tuning opens. Proceed to step 5.

Select this method in the following cases.

yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning after
additionally adding a new image to the
registration information (images and criteria
information) saved in the USB memory
yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning using the
registration information (images and criteria
information) saved in the USB memory after
readjusting the tool settings
Tool Auto Tuning by the registration
information file (Page 5-28)

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

6 After the registration is completed, tap the

[Save] button.

Registering the OK/NG images to

be used for the Tool Auto Tuning
Registering the images taken in the
Test mode
Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to
perform tuning while preparing the multiple high and
low-quality-target and checking the images imaged.

1 Display the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning.

The confirmation dialog appears.

Operating/Adjusting

Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning

(Page 5-16)

7 Tap the [OK] button.

2 Tap the [Take a picture] button.

Adjusted results will be reflected and the

information dialog appears.

8 Tap the [OK] button.

3 Image a high-quality-target to be the

criteria for the OK status or a low-qualitytarget to be the criteria for NG status.

If the target is to be imaged using an external

trigger, input the external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the
button.
By tapping the [Saving to the USB memory]
button, the result of Tool Auto Tuning can be
saved in the USB memory as a registration
information file and can be reused.

4 Check the displayed image and tap the

[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG] button.

For Outline tool

zz

The system returns to the Sensor setup menu

screen.

The auto tuning will be performed and the OK

or NG image will be displayed.
5-18

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

For Color Area tool (color type)

zz

yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous

operation can be cancelled.
yyTo change the color of extraction target, tap
the [Clear] button and tap the color to be the
reference of judgment again.
After the setting is completed, tap the [Register]
button.
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK
or NG image will be displayed.

If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the

information screen opens.
By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for
the brightness extraction area opens.
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
brightness to be the reference of judgment,
or operate the slider and expand/reduce the
brightness area to be extracted.

yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous

operation can be cancelled.
yyTo change the brightness of extraction target,
tap the [Clear] button and tap the brightness
to be the reference of judgment again.
yyFor details of settings by using the slider,
refer to
Editing the value with the slider
(Page 3-14).
After the setting is completed, tap the [Register]
button.
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK
or NG image will be displayed.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-19

5
Operating/Adjusting

If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the

information screen opens.
By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for
the color extraction area opens.
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the
[+]/[-] button and expand/reduce the color area
to be extracted.

For Area tool (monochrome type)

zz

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

5 Check the changes in settings after the

auto tuning is performed, and tap the [OK]

button.

Changed
settings

5
Operating/Adjusting

If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message

to change the tool settings or the image to be
registered.

Registering the images from the image

history saved in the sensor
Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to
perform tuning while checking the images loaded
from the Sensor Image History.

1 Display the main screen for Tool Auto

Tuning.

Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning

(Page 5-16)

2 Tap the [Sensor Image History] button.

The type of an image to be registered will be

displayed on the upper right on the screen.
yy

: Registers as an OK image.

yy

: Registers as an NG image.

The confirmation dialog to continuously register

another image appears.

6 Tap the [Yes] button and repeat steps 3 to 5.

The Sensor Image history screen opens.

3 Tap the image history to be the OK or NG

image and tap the [Zoom] button.

Select the
image

yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG

images is recommended.
yyUp to 24 images can be registered.

7 After the registration is completed, tap the

[No] button on the confirmation dialog.

The system returns to the main screen for Tool

Auto Tuning.
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning
(Page 5-16)

5-20

The selected image will be enlarged.

4 Check the displayed image and tap the

[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG]
button.

yyBy tapping [<]/[>] button, you can check the

other images in enlarged display.
yyThe status result displayed on the screen is
the status result by the settings at the time
of saving the image. If the tool settings are
changed after the image is saved, only the
frame of the tool window will be displayed
regardless of selection of the tool display
method (Page 5-7). The processing status
will not be displayed.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

For Outline tool

zz

For Area tool (monochrome type)

zz

The auto tuning will be performed and the OK

or NG image will be displayed.

If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the

information screen opens.
By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for
the color extraction area opens.
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the
[+]/[-] button for extraction area and expand/
reduce the color area to be extracted.

yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous

operation can be cancelled.
yyTo change the color of extraction target, tap
the [Clear] button and tap the color to be the
reference of judgment again.

yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous

operation can be cancelled.
yyTo change the brightness of extraction target,
tap the [Clear] button and tap the brightness
to be the reference of judgment again.
yyFor details of settings by using the slider,
refer to
Editing the value with the slider
(Page 3-14).
After the setting is completed, tap the [Register]
button.
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK
or NG image will be displayed.

After the setting is completed, tap the [Register]

button.
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK
or NG image will be displayed.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-21

5
Operating/Adjusting

For Color Area tool (color type)

zz

If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the

information screen opens.
By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for
the brightness extraction area opens.
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
brightness to be the reference of judgment,
or operate the slider and expand/reduce the
brightness area to be extracted.

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

5 Check the changes in settings after the

auto tuning is performed, and tap the [OK]

button.

Changed
settings

5
Operating/Adjusting

If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message

to change the tool settings or the image to be
registered.
The type of an image to be registered will be
displayed on the upper right on the screen.
yy

: Registers as an OK image.

yy

: Registers as an NG image.

Registering the images from the file

saved in the USB memory
Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to
perform tuning while checking the images loaded
from the USB memory.

1 Connect the USB memory on which the

batch backup files (*.iva) and image

capture files (*.ivp) are saved, to the USB
connector of the monitor.
Installing the USB memory (Page 6-18)

2 Display the main screen for Tool Auto

Tuning.

Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning

(Page 5-16)

3 Tap the [USB Memory Image] button.

The confirmation dialog to continuously register

another image appears.

6 Tap the [Yes] button and repeat steps 3 to 5.

yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG
images is recommended.
yyUp to 24 images can be registered.

The USB Memory Image screen opens.

7 After the registration is completed, tap the 4 Select a batch backup file (*.iva) or image
[No] button on the confirmation dialog.
The system returns to the main screen for Tool
Auto Tuning.
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning
(Page 5-16)

capture file (*.ivp) and tap the [OK] button.

Select a file to be
loaded

File formats other than *.iva or *.ivp cannot

be loaded.
For details of selecting files in the USB
memory, refer to
Selecting the file in the
USB memory (Page 3-17).

5-22

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

5 When the batch backup file (*.iva) is

selected, tap the image history to be the

OK or NG image and tap the [Zoom] button.

For Color Area tool (color type)

zz

Select the
image

The selected image will be enlarged.

[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG]

button.

yyWhen a batch backup file (*.iva) has been

selected, you can check the other images in
enlarged display by tapping the [<]/[>] button.
yyThe status result displayed on the screen
for the batch backup file (*.iva) is the status
result by the settings at the time of saving
the image.
yyFor the image capture file (*.ivp), only the
image will be displayed.

For Outline tool

zz

yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous

operation can be cancelled.
yyTo change the color of extraction target, tap
the [Clear] button and tap the color to be the
reference of judgment again.

The auto tuning will be performed and the OK

or NG image will be displayed.

After the setting is completed, tap the [Register]

button.
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK
or NG image will be displayed.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-23

5
Operating/Adjusting

6 Check the displayed image and tap the

If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the

information screen opens.
By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for
the color extraction area opens.
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the
[+]/[-] button for extraction area and expand/
reduce the color area to be extracted.

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

For Area tool (monochrome type)

zz

5
Operating/Adjusting

If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the

information screen opens.
By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for
the brightness extraction area opens.
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
brightness to be the reference of judgment,
or operate the slider and expand/reduce the
brightness area to be extracted.

7 Check the changes in settings after the

auto tuning is performed, and tap the [OK]

button.

Changed
settings

If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message

to change the tool settings or the image to be
registered.
The type of an image to be registered will be
displayed on the upper right on the screen.
yy

: Registers as an OK image.

yy

: Registers as an NG image.

The confirmation dialog to continuously register

another image appears.

8 Tap the [Yes] button and register the

images repeatedly.

yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous

operation can be cancelled.
yyTo change the brightness of extraction target,
tap the [Clear] button and tap the brightness
to be the reference of judgment again.
yyFor details of settings by using the slider,
refer to
Editing the value with the slider
(Page 3-14).
After the setting is completed, tap the [Register]
button.
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK
or NG image will be displayed.

5-24

yyIf the batch backup file (*.iva) is selected,

repeat steps 5 to 7.
yyIf the image capture file (*.ivp) is selected,
repeat steps 4 to 7.
yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG
images is recommended.
yyUp to 24 images can be registered.

9 After the registration is completed, tap the

[No] button on the confirmation dialog.

The system returns to the main screen for Tool

Auto Tuning.
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning
(Page 5-16)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

Confirming or deleting the images

registered for the Tool Auto Tuning
Confirm or delete the OK/NG images registered for
the Tool Auto Tuning.

1 Display the main screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning.

Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning

(Page 5-16)

2 Tap the [Confirmation of Registered Image]

Operating/Adjusting

button.

3 Confirm or delete the OK/NG image.

yy[First].................Displays the first image.

yy[<]......................Displays the previous image.
yy[>]......................Displays the next image.
yy[Last].................Displays the last image.
yy[Delete]..............Deletes the displayed image.
The setting is re-adjusts by
using the remaining images.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the

[Close] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the

Tool Auto Tuning.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-25

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

Tool Auto Tuning by the previous

registration information

5
Operating/Adjusting

When the information of Tool Auto Tuning

performed before turning off power of the monitor
or before disconnecting with the sensor (previous
registration information) is used, the Tool Auto
Tuning can be performed skipping the OK/NG
image registration process.
yyYou can additionally add a new image to the OK/
NG image registered with the previous Tool Auto
Tuning, and then perform Tool Auto Tuning.
yyYou can readjust the tool settings after Tool Auto
Tuning, and then repeat Tool Auto Tuning by the
registered image.

1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen (Page 6-7)

2 Tap the [Tool Auto Tuning] button.

When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen

opens, tap the [Start] button.

3 If multiple tools are set in the program,

select the target tool for the Tool Auto

Tuning from the pull-down menu and tap
the [OK] button.
Select the tool

Previous registration information

OK

OK

NG

OK

NG

OK

OK

The Start Up Menu screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning opens.

Tuning based on the OK/NG images registered

in the previous Tool Auto Tuning

The previous registration information is saved in

the memory (RAM) inside the monitor, and remains
available until the power of the monitor is turned off
or the monitor is disconnected with the sensor.
When you repeatedly perform Tool Auto Tuning using
the same previous registration information, settings
might be changed each time being performed.
This phenomenon occurs since Tool Auto Tuning
consistently performs adjustment based on the latest
settings (settings changed immediately before).

5-26

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

4 Tap the [Use the previous registered image] 7 After the registration is completed, tap the
button.

[Save] button.

Re-adjustment is performed by using the

previous registration information.

The confirmation dialog appears.

5 Check the changes made by

the re-adjustment and tap the [OK] button.

8 Tap the [OK] button.

Operating/Adjusting

The information dialog appears.

The adjustment result is reflected and the

information dialog appears.

9 Tap the [OK] button.

Changed
settings

The registration menu screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning opens.

6 To add images, register the OK/NG images.

Registering the OK/NG images to be used
for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-18)

By tapping the [Saving to the USB memory]

button, the result of Tool Auto Tuning can be
saved in the USB memory as a registration
information file and can be reused.
The system returns to the Sensor setup menu
screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-27

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

Tool Auto Tuning by the registration

information file

5
Operating/Adjusting

When the registration information file (*.ivt), which

contains the Tool Auto Tuning images and criteria
information saved at the end of the previous Tool
Auto Tuning is used, the Tool Auto Tuning can be
performed skipping the OK/NG image registration
process.
yyYou can additionally add a new image to the OK/
NG images registered with the previous Tool
Auto Tuning, and then perform Tool Auto Tuning.
yyYou can readjust the tool settings after Tool Auto
Tuning, and then repeat Tool Auto Tuning by the
registered image.

USB
memory
Registered information file (*.ivt)
OK

OK

NG

OK

NG

OK

1 Prepare the registration information file

(*.ivt).

A registration information file is saved at the

Tool Auto Tuning finish screen.
For the saving method, refer to the step 8 of
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning
(Page 5-16).

2 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

(Page 6-7)

3 Tap the [Tool Auto Tuning] button.

When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen opens,

tap the [Start] button.

4 If multiple tools are set in the program,

select the target tool for the Tool Auto

Tuning from the pull-down menu and tap
the [OK] button.

OK

Select the tool

Tuning based on the OK/NG images in the

registration information file

This is the function for the monitor operation software

version R1.10 or later. For the versions older than
R1.10, update the software to the latest version.
When you repeatedly perform Tool Auto Tuning
using the same registration information file, settings
might be changed each time being performed.
This phenomenon occurs since Tool Auto Tuning
consistently performs adjustment based on the latest
settings (settings changed immediately before).

5-28

The Start Up Menu screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning opens.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

5 Tap the [Use the registered information file] 7 Tap the [Go] button.
button.

The import screen for registration information

file appears.

Re-adjustment is performed by using the

registered information file.

5
Operating/Adjusting

6 Select the registered information file (*.ivt)

and tap the [OK] button.

Select the file to

be imported

The information dialog appears.

8 Check the changes made by the re-

adjustment and tap the [OK] button.

yyFiles with the formats other than ivt format

cannot be used.
yyIf the confirmation dialog appears, change
the registration file to be imported according
to the message.
yyFor the monitor operation software version
R1.10, this file cannot be use. Update the
software to the latest version.
For details of selecting the files in the USB
memory, refer to Selecting the file in the USB
memory (Page 3-17).
The confirmation screen opens.

Changed
settings

The registration menu screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning opens.

9 To add images, register the OK/NG images.

Registering the OK/NG images to be used
for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-18)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-29

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

10 After the registration is completed, tap the

[Save] button.

The confirmation dialog appears.

Operating/Adjusting

11 Tap the [OK] button.

Adjusted results will be reflected and the

information dialog appears.

12 Tap the [OK] button.

By tapping the [Saving to the USB memory]

button, the result of Tool Auto Tuning can be
saved in the USB memory as a registration
information and can be reused.
The system returns to the Sensor setup menu
screen.

5-30

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)

MEMO

5
Operating/Adjusting

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-31

Stabilizing the Judgment Process

Stabilizing the Judgment Process

This section explains how to adjust the device
when the judgment process is not stable.
To stabilize the judgment process, it is necessary
to take a clear image of the target and adjust the
detection tool such that it functions in a stable manner.

5
Operating/Adjusting

yyStabilize the judgment process by clearly imaging

the target (Page 5-32)
- Adjust the installation distance to image the
target widely
- Correct the distorted image due to the installation
- Make the image bright enough
- Focus well
- Make the image blur less
- Make the glossy or metal surface shine less
- Adjust the color tint (for color type only)
- Make the image less influenced by the lighting
condition
yyStabilize by adjusting the position gap of the
target (Page 5-36)
yyStabilize the position adjustment (Page 5-37)
yyStabilize the Outline tool (Page 5-38)
yyStabilize the Color Area/Area tool (Page 5-39)

Stabilizing the judgment process by

taking a clear image of the target
Adjust the imaging conditions so that the sensor can
take images with which the detection tools can clearly
recognize differences between high and low-qualitytarget.

Imaging the target widely

The judgment process stabilizes by taking a large
image of the target onto the screen.

Adjusting the installed distance (WD)

Install the sensor close to the target.

Install the sensor at the appropriate distance
from the target upon checking the field of view
and the installed distance of the sensor.
Checking the view and installed distance
(Page 2-2)

: Adequate

: Inadequate

If the judgment process is adjusted to make it

stabilize, the process time may become longer
depending on the function used. Adjust the
judgment process while confirming the balance
within the process time.

Using the digital zooming function

For the monochrome type, the target can be

imaged larger using the digital zooming function.
Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)
(Page 4-19)

5-32

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Stabilizing the Judgment Process

Correcting the distorted images due to

the installation
If the sensor is not installed just in front of the target
due to the sensor installation restrictions and/or to
prevent a shine on the targets surface, the target
image may become trapezoidally distorted.
The tilt correction corrects these images and
displays them without distortion.
Tilt Correction (Page 6-38)

Achieving adequate image brightness

If the image is too dark, the judgment process for
high and low-quality-targets becomes unstable due
to poor contrast. Also, if the image is too bright,
the judgment process may become unstable.
Brightness can be adjusted in Auto Brightness
Adjustment.
Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)

If the brightness cannot be adjusted

Indicator light

Top view
Target

Finer brightness adjustments can be made in

Advanced Brightness Adjustment.
Advanced Brightness Adjustment
(Page 4-18)

Target

Lateral view

Bright
zz
Setting a higher brightness value gives a longer
exposure time, resulting in a brighter screen.
Before tilt
correction

After tilt correction

(vertical)

Imaging Mode
zz
When "HighGain" is selected in the imaging
mode, the brightness amplification factor
increases and the screen becomes brighter.

If the brightness cannot be adjusted

due to uneven brightness

Refer to
Reducing the shininess of the
glossy or metal surface (Page 5-35).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-33

5
Operating/Adjusting

in the Auto Brightness Adjustment

Stabilizing the Judgment Process

Achieving good focus

Reducing the image blur

Adjusting the focus is required to clearly image of

the target. For the auto focus type, focus can be
adjusted easily in the Auto Focus Adjustment. For
the manual focus type, the focus can be adjusted
while confirming the image and focus indicator.
Focus Adjustment (Page 4-12)

If the image is blurred by imaging a moving

target, the image blurring can be corrected by
shortening the exposure time (shutter time). Adjust
the exposure time with the advanced brightness
adjustment.
Advanced Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-18)

If good focus cannot be achieved by

the Auto Focus Adjustment

Operating/Adjusting

The focusing position may not be adjusted

correctly if the image is too dark or too bright.
Adjust to the applicable brightness with Auto
Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11) and then
perform the auto focus adjustment.
If the focus still cannot be adjusted with the auto
focus adjustment for the auto focus type, adjust
the focus manually.
When the focusing position is to be
adjusted manually (Page 4-13)

Exposure time

Bright
zz
When the value of brightness is reduced, the
exposure time becomes shorter resulting in a
less blurry image.

Imaging Mode
zz
Select [HighGain] in the imaging mode so that
the brightness gain becomes higher. The screen
becomes brighter so that the exposure time can
be shortened and the image blurring can be
reduced. The image noise may increase.
Also, the exposure time may be shortened if the
[HDR] is selected in the imaging mode.

Adjust the focus position by tapping the [+] or [-]

button.

5-34

By unmounting the dome attachment or polarizing

filter attachment, image blurring can be lessened
as the exposure time can be shortened.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Stabilizing the Judgment Process

Reducing the shininess of the glossy

or metal surface
Glossy and/or metal surface may reflect the built-in
light into the camera. Since mirror reflection has a
high-light intensity, the amount of light received will
be saturated and the surface will shine. This section
explains how to reduce the shininess.

Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment

Use the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/

OP-87437). The optical characteristics of the
polarizing filter attachment cut off the mirror
reflection and reduce the shine on the targets
surface.
Using the polarizing filter attachment
(Page 2-7)

Installing the sensor at an angle

The built-in lighting will not reflected back into

the camera, so the shine on the targets surface
can be reduced.
This is effective for flat-surface targets.
When the sensor is
installed in front of
the target

When the sensor is

installed at an angle
from the target

Using the dome attachment

Use the dome attachment (IV-D10).

The dome attachment emits even diffused light
from the entire circumference to the target, so
that the contrast becomes less and the shine on
the targets surface is reduced.
This is effective for targets of all shapes.
Using the dome attachment (Page 2-6)

Dome attachment

The mirror reflection

of the built-in light
reflects into the
camera and causes
the surface to shine.

The mirror reflection

of the built-in light
does not reflect into
the camera so no
surface shine occurs.

If the image is distorted by tilting the sensor,

the image can be corrected by the tilt
correction function.
Tilt Correction (Page 6-38)

Diffusion
light

Target

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-35

5
Operating/Adjusting

If the target shines, the HDR function is enabled

automatically and it can be reduced by using
the auto brightness adjustment.
The HDR (High Dynamic Range) function is
a function that prevents light saturation in the
shining area by imaging the target with a wider
dynamic range. The HDR function can also be
adjusted manually.
Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
Advanced Brightness Adjustment
(Page 4-18)

Using the polarizing filter attachment

Stabilizing the Judgment Process

Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)

Adjust the white balance if the color tint of the color
type image is different from that of the target.
White Balance (for color type only) (Page 6-41)

Reducing the effect of illumination

variation

5
Operating/Adjusting

If the detection is not stable due to the ambient

light from the surroundings where the sensor is
installed, the effect of the illumination variation can
be reduced by the brightness correction function.
If the detection cannot be stabilized with the
brightness correction function, use a shielding
around the sensor to prevent from the ambient light.
Brightness correction (Page 4-26)

Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned

target position
If there is a variation (misalignment) in the positioning
of the target, the position to be judged is also declined
from the tool window and cannot be judged correctly.
The detection can be stabilized by using the
position adjusting function.
Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-51)

Tool settings

Master image

Tool window
Position adjustment window

Processing during an operation

Position adjustment process

Tool window
Position adjustment window
Search region of the tool window

5-36

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Stabilizing the Judgment Process

Stabilizing the position adjustment

This section explains how to adjust when the
position adjustment is not stable.
Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-51)

If the target tilts and the position

adjustment becomes unstable

Search region
Rotation range

Basic adjustments

Set the position adjustment window as large as possible

by selecting a part that contains a unique shape.
If there are many variation of a target shapes
that a position adjustment window has been set,
set the threshold which has lower matching rate.

Position adjustment window

Since the convex part assigned in the position

adjustment window does not exist in any other
part of the target, the position adjustment can
be performed correctly without being recognition
error.

: Bad example

yyBroaden the rotation range if the tilt of the target

exceeds the rotation range (default value: 20).
Rotation Range (Page 4-57)
yyTo stabilize the position adjustment, the tool
window will search with the range few
degrees wider than the setting value of rotation
range. (The tool window will search few
degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0.)
Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like
to detect the target in accordance with the set
rotation angle of the target.
Margin (Page 4-57)

Search Region
zz
Broaden the search region if the variation in the
position determining of the target exceeds the
region to be searched.
Setting a search region (Page 4-55)

Example 1
Example 2

If the position adjustment becomes

unstable due to the effect of the

unwanted outlines

Position adjustment window

The position adjustment cannot function

correctly in the following examples.
Example 1: The straight line that the position
adjustment window is set cannot be
identified uniquely because there
are many similar straight lines exist
in other parts of the target.
Example 2: The angle section that the position
adjustment window is set cannot be
identified uniquely because there
are many similar angle sections exist
in other parts of the target.

yyThe outline disabling function can disable

unwanted outlines.
Settings for disabling outlines (Page 4-55)
yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].
Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-56)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-37

Operating/Adjusting

: Good example

Rotation Range
zz

Stabilizing the Judgment Process

If the outline of the reference target

cannot be detected

5
Operating/Adjusting

yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline

may not be extracted. Set the extraction
sensitivity to [High].
Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-56)
If the process remain unstable even after
setting the extraction sensitivity to [High], it is
necessary to adjust the exposure condition for
the target.
Stabilizing the judgment process by taking
a clear image of the target (Page 5-32)
yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may
become stable by using the color filter.
Color Filters (color type only) (Page 4-19)

Stabilizing the Outline tool

This section explains how to adjust the outline tool
when the judgment for high and low-quality-targets
is not stable.
Outline tool (Page 4-32)

Basic adjustments

yySet the tool window as large as possible by

selecting a part contains a unique shape.
yyIf the same or similar shapes are misrecognized,
set the search region so that no outlines are
searched beyond the target area.
Setting a search region (Page 4-35)
yyAdjust the threshold to the average of the
high and low-quality-target. The judgment
condition and threshold can also be optimized
automatically to the most appropriate condition
and value by using the Tool Auto Tuning.
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14)
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
the Judgment Condition) (Page 5-15)

If the outline cannot be detected when

the target becomes out of position

Adjust the search region. Broaden the search

region if the varies of the position determining of
the target exceeds the region to be searched.
Setting a search region (Page 4-35)

If the detection becomes unstable due

to the effect of the unwanted outline

other than the target

yyThe outline disabling function can disable

unwanted outlines.
Settings for disabling outlines (Page 4-35)
yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].
Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-36)
yySet the search region so that non-target images
containing unwanted outlines are not searched.
Setting a search region (Page 4-35)
yySet the search algorithm to [High Accuracy].
Search Algorithm (Page 4-38)
yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by
making the target background plain, etc.

5-38

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Stabilizing the Judgment Process

If the target tilts and the outline

cannot be detected

If the match rate difference between the

high and low-quality-targets is small

Adjust the search algorithm.

If there is no difference between the match rate
for high and low-quality-target, select the [High
Accuracy]. This will result in better judgment
accuracy. However, the processing time becomes
longer.
Search Algorithm (Page 4-38)

If the outline of the target cannot be

detected

yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline

may not be extracted. Set the extraction
sensitivity to [High].
Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-36)
If the process remain unstable even after setting
the extraction sensitivity to [High], it is necessary
to adjust the exposure condition for the target.
Stabilizing the judgment process by taking
a clear image of the target (Page 5-32)
yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may
become stable by using the color filter.
Color Filters (color type only) (Page 4-19)

This section explains how to adjust the Color Area/

Area tool when the judgment for the high and lowquality-target is not stable.
Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-40)

Basic adjustments

Adjust the threshold to the average of the high

and low-quality-target. The color extraction range,
brightness extraction range and threshold can also
be optimized automatically to the most appropriate
ranges and values by using the tool auto tuning.
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14)
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
the Judgment Condition) (Page 5-15)

If the color you wish to judge cannot

be extracted

yyTap and extract the color or the brightness to

be the reference for judgment.
y
y By repeatedly tapping the un-extracted color or
brightness, the extraction range can be added.
yyAdjust the extraction range with the extraction
range zoom in/zoom out ([+]/[-] buttons).
Tap the [+] button to expand the color or
brightness range currently being extracted.
Tap the [-] button to reduce the range.
Setting the Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-42)
yySet the [Fixed Reference Area] to [Enable].
Extended functions of the Color Area/
Area tool (Page 4-48)

If the area search becomes unstable

due to unwanted colors being extracted

Adjust with the mask function. The region in
which unwanted colors are extracted can be
disabled.
Mask settings (Page 4-45)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-39

5
Operating/Adjusting

yyAdjust the rotation range. Broaden the rotation

range if the tilt of the target exceeds the
rotation range (default value: 20).
Rotation Range (Page 4-38)
yyTo stabilize the detection, the tool window will
search with the range few degrees wider
than the setting value of rotation range. (The
tool window will search few degrees even if
the rotation range is set to 0.)
Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like
to detect the target in accordance with the set
rotation angle of the target.
Margin (Page 4-37)

Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool

Shortening the Processing Time

Shortening the Processing Time

5
Operating/Adjusting

This section explains how to adjust the device to

shorten the processing time.
To shorten the processing time, perform
adjustments to shorten the processing times of the
imaging process and the detection tools.
yyShorten the imaging processing time (Page 5-41)
yyShorten the processing time of the detection tools
(Page 5-41)
yyShorten the processing time of the Outline tool
(Page 5-41)
yyShorten the processing time of the Color Area/
Area tool (Page 5-42)
yyShorten the processing time of the position
adjustment (Page 5-42)

For the processing time

The processing time is the period of time from when
an external or internal trigger is received until the
status result is finalized.
The processing time is displayed at the upper right
of the run screen or the test screen.
Processing time

Flow of the internal process

If the processing time is shortened, the stability of

judgment may decrease. The processing time should
therefore be adjusted with a view of maintaining
balance with the stability of the judgment process.

Trigger input

Imaging

(Tilt Correction)
(Brightness
Correction)
(Position
Adjustment)

Processing time

Tool 1 process

Tool 2 process

Tool n process

Status output

Methods to shorten the processing time are as

follows.
yyShortening the imaging processing time.
yyShortening the processing time of each tool.
yyDo not use correction functions (tilt correction,
brightness correction, and position adjustment).
yyDo not use the FTP client function.
yyDo not use a field network.
5-40

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Shortening the Processing Time

Shortening the imaging processing

time
Imaging Area
zz
The processing time can be shortened by
adjusting the imaging area.
Entire imaging area (default value)
Reduce the imaging area

Shortening the processing time of

each tool
Shortening the processing time of the
Outline tool
The processing time can be shortened by adjusting
the settings for the search region, rotation range,
and search algorithm.
Search region

Rotation range

Operating/Adjusting

Non-imaged area

Reduce the imaging area by setting the imaging

area from Entire (default value) to Partial. The
processing time for capturing the image in Nonimaged area can be shortened. The importing
time will be shortened by narrowing the vertical
direction (V).
Imaging Area (Page 4-17)

Exposure Time
zz

Search Region
zz

The searching time can be shortened by

reducing the search region and setting the
region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial].
Make sure that the range of position determining
of the target does not exceed the search region.
Setting a search region (Page 4-35)

Rotation Range
zz

The processing time can be shortened by

shortening the exposure time (Page 4-18). The
longer exposure time makes the processing
time longer than the displayed exposure time.
By unmounting the dome attachment or
polarizing filter attachment, the exposure time
can be shortened.

Selecting the tool

The target search time while rotating the master

image can be shortened by reducing the rotation
range (default value: 20).
Make sure that the range of an installation angle
of the target does not exceed the rotation range.
Rotation Range (Page 4-38)

Search Algorithm
zz

Select the [High Speed]. This will decrease the

judgment accuracy, but the processing time will be
shorter.
Search Algorithm (Page 4-38)

Producing an image with less unwanted

zz

The processing time of the Color Area/Area tool

will be shorter than the Outline tool. Therefore, you
should select the Color Area/Area tool whenever
possible.

outlines

The processing time becomes longer for images

with multiple unwanted outlines other than the
target outlines.
yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by
making the target background plain, etc.
yySet the search region so that non-target images
containing unwanted outlines are not searched.
Setting a search region (Page 4-35)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-41

Shortening the Processing Time

Shortening the processing time of the

Color Area/Area tool

Shortening the processing time of the

position adjustment

The processing time can be shortened by adjusting

the window shape settings.

When the position adjustment is performed, the

processing time can be shortened by adjusting the
search region settings or rotation range settings.

Window shape

Search region
Rotation range

5
Operating/Adjusting

Window Shape
zz
If the current window shape is [Entire], reduce
the window shape by modifying the setting to
[ Rect] or [ Circle].
The processing time can be shortened by reducing
the time required for the area processing.
Setting the Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-42)

Search Region
zz
The searching time can be shortened by
reducing the search region and setting the
region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial].
Note that the range of the target position that
the position adjustment function can correct
becomes narrower.
Setting a search region (Page 4-55)

Rotation Range
zz
The target search time while rotating the master
image can be shortened by reducing the rotation
range (default value: 20).
Note that the range of the target angle that
the position adjustment function can correct
becomes narrower.
Rotation Range (Page 4-57)

Producing an image with less

zz
unnecessary outlines

The processing time becomes longer for images

with multiple unwanted outlines other than the
target outlines.
yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by
making the target background plain, etc.
yySet the search region so that non-target images
containing unwanted outlines are not searched.
Setting a search region (Page 4-55)

5-42

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6


Useful Features/
Various Functions

This chapter explains the useful features of the sensor

and the monitor. The Sensor Setup Menu screen, the
Sensor Advanced screen, and the Monitor Settings
screen are also explained.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-1

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

List of the Useful Features................................6-2

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen.....6-7
Changeover for a Target 
(Program Functions)..........................................6-8
Sensor Image History (Confirming
the Images whose Status Result is NG).........6-14
Saving the Sensor Settings and
Images to a USB Memory................................6-18
Setting the Extended Functions of
the Sensor.........................................................6-25
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information....6-45

List of the Useful Features

List of the Useful Features

Useful features while running
Items

Things you want to do

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

Analysis

Reference
page

Up to 32 types (products) of
products can be registered
and loaded.

6-8

Assign a name to the settings

of each product for easy
Program function
identification

A name can be assigned to

the used program.

6-12

Prevent misoperation by the

operator

Misoperation can be prevented by

yyPassword Lock
yyTouch Screen Lock setting a password on the monitor.

6-30
6-50

Assign a name to each

sensor for easy identification

Device Name

A device name and a study name

can be assigned to the sensor.

6-29

Automatically register the

master image

External master
registration

Registers the master image

from external input.

6-26

Automatically save and

confirm the NG images

Sensor Image
History

The latest 100 images (in color)

or 300 images (in monochrome)
can be saved into the memory of
the sensor and confirmed them.

6-14

Confirm the image history in

the sensor saved as a batch
backup file (*.iva).

The sensor image history can

Simulator functions
be confirmed by opening the
of IV-Navigator
batch backup file.

Specify a screen and save it

to a USB memory

Screen Capture

Tap the title on the desired

screen to capture it.

6-23

Check the operation status

statistically

Statistical process
screen

The statistical data of the

processing times and results
can be confirmed.

5-10

Check the operation status

with a histogram

Histogram screen

The status result of each

tool can be displayed in the
histogram screen.

5-12

FTP client function

Data of the images captured

by the sensor and the status
result information can be
automatically transferred to
an FTP server.

6-32

Automatically save data

of the images captured by
the sensor and the status
result information outside the
sensor

6-2

Description

Program function

Change over the program

Operation

Useful functions

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1-5

List of the Useful Features

Items

Things you want to do

Useful functions

Description

Reference
page

The menu and title can be

hidden and the image will be
displayed in full-screen.

5-5

Zoom in/out the images

Zoom button

The zoom ratio can be

changed to x 1/x 1.5/x 2/x 3.

5-6

Adjust the brightness of the

backlight

Backlight

The brightness of the backlight

can be adjusted between 7 levels.

6-52

Dim the backlight when not in

use

Backlight

The monitor can be set to dim

automatically when not used
for a specific period of time.

6-52

Change the display language Language

The language can be changed

to Japanese, English,
Deutsch, Chinese (Simplified),
Chinese (Traditional), Italian,
French, Spanish, Portuguese
or Korean.

6-51

Hide the trigger button

The [Trig] button displayed

when the external trigger is
selected can be hidden.

6-49

If the image is not need to be

displayed, the screen update
can become faster by setting to
display the status result only.

6-49

Display

Manual Trigger

Update Image in
Make the screen update faster
RUN Mode

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-3

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

Confirm images hidden under

Zoom button
the menu or title

List of the Useful Features

Useful features during installation/adjustment

Items

Stabilize the detection

Judgment Shorten the process time
process Issue an internal trigger and
perform judgment process
within the shortest cycle

Adjust the threshold for the

Threshold detection by using the saved
images

Useful Features/Various Functions

Prevent internal lighting from

blinking

Imaging

6-4

Description

Reference
page

Adjusts the sensor installation

and the settings navigator.

5-32

Adjusts the settings navigator.

5-40

Sets the trigger interval to 1ms.

7-3

Tool Auto Tuning

The threshold can be set

automatically by selecting an
image and specifying to OK or NG.

5-15

The light can be set to stay lit at

Continuous lighting all times by synchronizing with
the trigger.

4-18

Things you want to do

Useful functions

Tilt Correction

The distorted images due to

the limitations for the sensor
installation can be corrected
and displayed correctly.

6-38

Adjust the color tint (white

balance)

White Balance

The color tint can be adjusted

and displayed correctly.

6-41

Correct the images of a

target that are rotated 180

Rotate 180

The image of a target can be

rotated 180 without adjusting
the sensor's position.

6-40

Correct the distorted images

due to being taken from an
angle

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

List of the Useful Features

Items

Useful functions

Description

Reference
page

Confirm/edit the settings or

confirm the operation results
without connecting to the
sensor.

The settings can be confirmed

or edited by using a batch
Simulator functions
backup files (*.iva). Also,
of IV-Navigator
the operation results can be
simulated.

Back up the settings to the

USB memory

Batch Backup

The settings for the sensor

can be read and saved into
the USB memory.

6-19

Copy the settings to multiple

sensors

Transfer Program
Settings

The batch backup data stored

into the USB memory can be
transferred to another sensor.

6-21

Copy the settings and use

the settings to set another
product

Program function

The settings of a set program

number which has been set
can be copied to another
program number.

6-12

Confirm the settings of the

sensor with the list.

Export functions of
IV-Navigator

The list of settings can be

confirmed with Microsoft Excel
etc.

1-5

Initialize the settings of the

sensor

Initialize Sensor

The settings can be initialized

to the factory default.

6-44

Initialize the settings of the

monitor

Initialize Monitor

The settings can be initialized

to the factory default.

6-53

Confirm the version of the

sensor

Sensor Information

The version for the model or

the operation software can be
confirmed.

6-43

Confirm the version of the

monitor

The version for the model or

Monitor Information the operation software can be
confirmed.

6-53

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

1-5

6-5

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

Settings

Things you want to do

List of the Useful Features

Items

Description

Reference
page

The operation test for the input

and output line can be performed.

6-28

Switch to NPN output or PNP

Polarity
output

The polarity can be changed

to NPN or PNP according to
the controlling device used.

6-28

Switch the output to N.O. or N.C. Output Settings

The settings for each OUT can

be changed to N.O. or N.C.

6-27

Output the status output with

one-shot

Common Output
Settings

The output can be changed

from latching output to oneshot output.

6-27

Output the status output with

on-delay

Common Output
Settings

On-delay time can be set for

the one-shot output.

6-27

Switch the external trigger to

rise or fall

Input Settings

Rising trigger or falling

trigger can be selected as
the operation of the external
trigger

6-26

Output the NG status results

Total status NG
output

When the total status result

of each detection tool was
NG, the total status NG output
function turns ON.

4-60

Confirm whether or not the

sensor is running properly

RUN output

When the sensor is running

with no system error occurring,
the output function turns ON.

4-60

Form a logical operation of

status result

Logic output

Logical operation result of each

detection tool can be assigned
to the output function.

4-63

Change the total status

conditions

Total status
conditions

The total status conditions can

be selected from [All Tools OK]/
[Any Tool OK]/[Logic 1] to [Logic
4].

4-65

Things you want to do

Confirm whether or not the
input and output lines are
correctly wired

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

I/O lines

6-6

Useful functions
I/O Monitor

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

This section explains the Sensor Setup Menu
screen, which is displayed by tapping the [Setup]
button when the menu display of the monitor is ON.

1 Set the menu display of the monitor ON

and tap the [Sensor Setup] button.

(2) [Detail] button

By tapping the [Detail] button, the Program
Details screen opens. The master image can be
confirmed and the program name can be edited.
Editing a program name (Page 6-12)
Copying a program (Page 6-12)
Initializing a program (Page 6-13)
(3) Master image
Displays the master image registered to the
currently selected program. If no master image is
registered, the [No Master Image] will be displayed.
(4) [Sensor Setup] button
Start the Settings Navigator.
Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1)
(5) [Limit Adjustment] button
Adjusts the threshold of the tool registered in
the currently selected program.
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-14)

2 Tap the [OK] button.

(6) [Tool Auto Tuning] button

Performs the auto tuning of the tool registered
in the currently selected program.
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
the Judgment Condition) (Page 5-15)
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.
The displayed items are as follows.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(1) Program
Displays the program number of the selected
program. The program can be switched from
the pull-down menu.
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
(Page 6-8)

(7) [Sensor Advanced] button

Performs the advanced settings for the sensor.
Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor
(Page 6-25)
(8) [Sensor Image History] button
Displays the image history saved in the sensor.
Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-14)
(9) [USB Memory] button
Operates the USB memory connected to the
monitor.
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a
USB Memory (Page 6-18)
(10) [RUN] button
Starts running the sensor.
Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting (Page 5-1)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-7

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

The confirmation dialog appears.

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)

Overview of the program functions
The sensor can save the judgment condition set in
the settings navigator as a program up to 32 types
(32 products).
By reading the judgment condition which has been
saved according to each product, changeover can
be done easily.
Sensor
PROG31 : Product XX

PROG02 : Product C

Things can be performed with

the program functions
yySaves 32 types (32 products) of judgment
conditions (programs).
Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1)
yyReads and operates the saved program.
Using the program functions (changing over)
(Page 6-10)
yySelects the reading method of the program.
Program Switch Method (Page 6-42)
yyNames the judgment conditions (programs).
Editing a program name (Page 6-12)

Useful Features/Various Functions

PROG01 : Product B

yyCopies and uses the judgment conditions (programs).

Copying a program (Page 6-12)

PROG00 : Product A
Settings Navigator
*1
yyImaging settings
yyMaster image
*2
yyTool settings
yyOutput Assignment

yyReturns the judgment conditions (programs) to

the status before setting.
Initializing a program (Page 6-13)

Sensor Advanced
yyEnvironmental
yySetup Adjustment
yySwitching programs
*1
*2

6-8

The auto focus type includes the focusing

position.
Including the threshold of each tool.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)

Preparing the program functions

Registers the judgment condition for each product
to the program before running.

Preparation flow
(1) Select a program number
Select a program number to register a judgment
condition from PROG00 to PROG31.

Preparation procedures

1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

(Page 6-7)

2 Select a program number to register a

judgment condition of a product.

(2) Set a judgment condition in the Settings

Navigator
Set the judgment condition for a product in the
Settings Navigator.

The following functions can be used with the

preparations for the program function.
yyThe product name can be registered to the
program.
Editing a program name (Page 6-12)
yyTo register a similar product, the program can
be copied, and then the settings can be edited.
Copying a program (Page 6-12)
yyInitializes and returns the judgment condition
registered in the program to the status before
setting.
Initializing a program (Page 6-13)

6
The program can also be selected from the
[Detail] button (Page 6-7).

3 Set a judgment condition in the Settings

Navigator.

Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the

Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1)

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to register programs

for the number of products that are to be
changed over.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-9

Useful Features/Various Functions

(3) Select a program switch method

Select a switch method. There are methods
such as switching from the external input line or
switching by tapping the monitor.

Select the
program

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)

5 Select a program switch method.

Using the program functions

(changing over)
When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in the
Program Switch Method

1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

Program Switch Method (Page 6-42)

yyMonitor/PC........Switching by tapping the
monitor screen or operating
from the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)
or the field network.
yyExternal IN........Switching by inputting signals
from PLC to the input line of
the sensor.

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

(Page 6-7)

2 Select the program number that the

product to be judged is registered.

Select the
program

6 If the [External IN] is selected in the

program switch method, set the input

terminal.

Input Settings (Page 6-26)

The bit to be set differs depending on the
product numbers to be registered.
Product numbers to
be registered
(Program numbers)
2

bit to be assigned
to the input line

3 Tap the [RUN] button and the run mode

will start with the new program.

bit0

3 to 4

bit0/bit1

5 to 8

bit0/bit1/bit2

9 to 16

bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3

17 to 32

bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3/bit4

Setup example
When 7 types of products are to be registered,
bit0, bit1, and bit2 are assigned to arbitrary IN
terminals. bit3 and bit4 are not assigned.

6-10

The program number can also be selected

while confirming a master image with the
[Detail] button (Page 6-7).

For details of how to switch from the IV-Navigator

(IV-H1), refer to "IV Series User's Manual (PC
Software)".

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)

When the [External IN] is selected in the Program Switch Method

1 Start the run mode.

Starting an Operation (Page 5-2)

2 Select the program number to which the product to be judged is registered with the status
of the input line.

Change the input lines IN2 to IN6 which were assigned to bit0 to bit4 in the input settings (Page 6-26)
to the following statuses and maintain the settings. Start the run mode with the new program number.
Program
number

bit4
(MSB)

bit3

bit2

bit1

bit0
(LSB)

Program
number

PROG00

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

PROG16

bit4
(MSB)
ON

bit3

bit2

bit1

bit0
(LSB)

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

PROG17

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

PROG18

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

PROG03

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

PROG19

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

PROG04

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

PROG20

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

PROG05

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

PROG21

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

PROG06

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

PROG22

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

PROG07

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

PROG23

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

PROG08

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

PROG24

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

PROG09

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

PROG25

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

PROG10

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

PROG26

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

PROG11

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

PROG27

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

PROG12

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

PROG28

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

PROG13

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

PROG29

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

PROG14

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

PROG30

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

PROG15

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

PROG31

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-28) is [NPN]

yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-28) is [PNP]

ON :
OFF :
ON :
OFF :

the state shorted with 0 V line

Open
the state that voltage is applied
Open

For details of the controlling method and the timing chart, refer to

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Changing Over (Page 7-7).

6-11

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

PROG01
PROG02

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)

Editing a program name

Copying a program

Tap the [Detail] button in the Sensor Setup Menu

screen and edit the program name.

Copies a set program to another program number.

Re-uses the set items and creates a new program.

1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

2 Tap the [Detail] button.

2 Tap the [Detail] button.

3 Select the program to change the name

3 Select the program number to be copied

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

(Page 6-7)

The Program Details screen opens.

and tap the [Edit] button.

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

(Page 6-7)

The Program Details screen opens.

and tap the [Copy] button.

Useful Features/Various Functions

Select the
program

The selected program can be moved by tapping

the [<] or [>] button.
The screen to edit the program name opens.

Enter the arbitrary name and tap the [OK]

button.

Select the
program

The selected program can be moved by tapping

the [<] or [>] button.

4 Select the program number to be the copy

destination and tap the [Go] button.

Select the
program
number

For details of how to enter characters, refer to

Inputting characters (Page 3-16).
The system returns to the Program Details screen.
If the display language (Page 6-51) is changed,
the program name might be replaced and
displayed as hyphens (-).

The copy source program is copied to the copy

destination.
Copied program

6-12

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)

Initializing a program
Initializes settings in the program and resets to the
default.

1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

(Page 6-7)

2 Tap the [Detail] button.

The Program Details screen opens.

3 Select the program to be initialized and

tap the [Initialize] button.

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

Select the
program

The selected program can be moved by tapping

the [<] or [>] button.
The confirmation dialog appears.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Program Details screen.

The initialized program becomes [No Master Image].

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-13

Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)

Sensor Image History

(Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
The sensor has a built-in memory for saving images used for judgment. According to the saving condition,
it automatically saves the latest images. The saving conditions are as follows.
yyNG images only (default value).... Saves the images whose total status result was NG.
yyAll images..................................... Saves all the images that were judged.
Loads the saved images into the monitor and the images can be used for confirming the causes and
tendency of the NG result.
The numbers of images can be saved are as follows.
yyColor type...................... 100 images
yyMonochrome type.......... 300 images
The number of images which can be saved when using the FTP client function are as follows.
yyColor type...................... 70 images
yyMonochrome type.......... 210 images

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

Since the memory of the sensor image history is volatile, all saved images are erased when the power
is turned OFF.
To save the images, batch back up the images into a USB memory.

Displaying the Sensor Image History screen

This section explains how to display the Sensor Image History screen.
There are two methods for displaying the Sensor Image History screen.
The [Logging Settings] can be set only when it is displayed from the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Displaying from the run screen

Tap the [Sensor Image History] button

when the menu display of the monitor is
set to ON.

The Sensor Image History screen opens.

6-14

Displaying from the Sensor Setup

Menu screen

1 Tap the [Sensor Image History] button in

the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

The Sensor Image History screen opens.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)

Loading and confirming the saved

images

The View screen opens.

(1)

Displays the image history in the sensor.

1
2

(2)

Display the Sensor Image History screen.

Displaying the Sensor Image History screen
(Page 6-14)

Tap the [View] button.

(3)
(4)
(5)

(6)

(7)

(1) Page number

Indicates the page number of the image history.

When displaying from the run screen, the

confirmation dialog appears. Select whether or
not to pause.
When the operation is not paused
yyThe added or overwritten history image will
not be updated automatically. For updating,
close the history image display once and
then display it again.
yyWhen the history image is erased by
overwriting and updating in the sensor
during displaying on the monitor, it may not
be displayed again on the monitor.

For details of the number of triggers,

refer to
Displaying the statistical information
(Page 5-10).
(3) Detailed information
Displays the detailed information for the
selected thumbnail image.
Displays the program number, program name,
number of triggers, status results for the position
adjustment, and the status results for each tool.
(4) Operation buttons
Selects a thumbnail image.
yy[First].................Moves to the first page of the
image history.
yy[<<]....................Moves to the previous page.
yy[<]......................Moves to the previous history.
yy[>]......................Moves to the next history.
yy[>>]....................Moves to the next page.
yy[Last].................Moves to the last page of the
image history.
(5) [Batch Backup] button
Backs up the images in a batch.
Saving the sensor settings or the image
history (Page 6-19)
To back up the images in a batch from
the View screen, the saving target will be
[Prog.+Image Hist.].

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-15

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

(2) Thumbnail images

Displays the number of triggers, total status
result, and thumbnail image.

Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)

(6) [View] button

Zooms in on the selected image history on the
monitor.

Clearing the saved images

Clears the image histories saved in the sensor.

1 Display the Sensor Image History screen.

Displaying the Sensor Image History screen
(Page 6-14)

2 Tap the [Clear] button.

yy[<] button
Moves to the previous history.

Useful Features/Various Functions

yy[>] button
Moves to the next history.
yy[Save to USB Memory] button
Saves the displayed image to the USB memory.
Saving the image history individually (Page 6-20)
yy[Auto Tuning] button
Performs auto tuning based on the displayed
history.
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
the Judgment Condition) (Page 5-15)

The confirmation dialog appears.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

The image history will be cleared and the

system returns to the run screen or the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.

yyTitle
Displays the program number, program name
and number of triggers.
In the following cases, characters of the title
are displayed in yellow.
yyImages which the tool settings was changed
after image history saving
yyWhen Tool Auto Tuning has been performed
Moreover, if [Process 1] / [Process 2] / [Process]
is selected for Tool View (Page 5-7), only
the tool window is displayed and the process
contents are not displayed.
(7) [Back] button
The system returns to the run screen or the
Sensor Setup Menu screen.

6-16

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)

Changing the logging conditions of

the image history
Sets the logging condition (storage condition) for
the image history.

1 Display the Sensor Image History screen.

Display the Sensor Image History screen from
the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
The [Logging Settings] can be set only when
it is selected from the Sensor Setup Menu
screen.

Displaying the Sensor Image History screen

(Page 6-14)

Useful Features/Various Functions

2 Tap the [Logging Settings] button.

3 Select a logging condition.

yyAll......................Saves all the images to the

image history regardless of
the status result.
yyNG only.............Only saves the images whose
status result is NG to the
image history.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu

screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-17

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to

a USB Memory
Connect the USB memory to the monitor so that
the data backup, settings data transfer, and screen
capture can be performed.

Installing/Removing the USB memory

Installing the USB memory

1 Open the cover of the USB connecting

connector on the monitor.

2 Connect the USB memory to the USB

Displaying the USB Memory screen

This section explains how to display the USB
Memory screen.
There are two methods for displaying the USB
Memory screen.
The items can be set are the same for the two methods.

Displaying from the run screen

1 Tap the [USB Memory] button with the state that

the menu display of the monitor is set to ON.

connector.

Useful Features/Various Functions

The USB Memory screen opens.

Supported formats : FAT (FAT16) / FAT32

Removing the USB memory

The USB memory can be removed at any time,
except while a progress bar or a dialog indicating that
a saving process is in progress is being displayed.

1 Remove the USB memory from the USB

connecting connector.

The [Batch Backup] button and [Transfer

Program Settings] button are available only
when the USB memory is attached.

Displaying from the Sensor Setup

Menu screen

1 Tap the [USB Memory] button in the

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

The USB Memory screen opens.

6-18

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory

Saving the sensor settings or

the image history
Backing up in a batch
Backs up the data saved in the sensor into the USB
memory in a batch.
When multiple sensors are to be used, the settings
can be copied based on the batch backup data.
The image history of the batch backup data can be
confirmed by the simulation function of IV-Navigator.

1 Connect the USB memory to the USB

connector of the monitor.

Installing/Removing the USB memory

(Page 6-18)

2 Display the USB Memory screen.

Displaying the USB Memory screen (Page 6-18)

3 Tap the [Batch Backup] button.

Displays the name of the folder to be created on

the USB memory. "Device name_Last 24bit of
the MAC address" will be automatically set.

File Name
zz
Displays the name of the backup file. Tap the
[Edit] button and the name can be edited to the
arbitrary name.
For details of how to enter characters, refer to
Inputting characters (Page 3-16).

Save
zz
Selects the backup target.
yyProgram Only....Backs up the sensor settings
(the Sensor Setup (Settings
Navigator) and Sensor
Advanced settings of all
programs).
Prog.+
.......Backs up all the images in the
yy
Image Hist.
image history as well as the
sensor settings.
When the image history has been saved
[During operation], the image being the saving
object may be updated and deleted during the
batch backup. A deleted image is not saved.
Because of this, saving [During setting] is
recommended.

File Size
zz
Displays the size of the backup file (expectancy)
and the free space of the USB memory.

5 After the setting is completed, tap the [Go]

button.

The Batch Backup screen opens.

4 Perform the Batch Backup settings.

After the batch backup completes, the backup

result appears on the monitor.

6 Confirm the backup result and tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the run screen or the

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-19

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

yyIt is recommended to perform a batch backup

of the data saved in the sensor in case of
malfunction of the product.
yyThe saving time increases when this is
performed in [During operation]. Execution while
in the [During setting] status is recommended.

Folder
zz

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory

Saving the image history individually

1 Connect the USB memory to the USB

connector of the monitor.

Installing/Removing the USB memory

(Page 6-18)

2 Display the zoom-in screen of the image

history screen.

Loading and confirming the saved images

(Page 6-15)

3 Tap the [Save to USB Memory] button.

Useful Features/Various Functions

4 Edit the file name as needed and tap the

[Go] button.

The image history will be saved to the USB

memory and the storage result appears.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the zoom-in screen of the

image history screen.

6-20

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory

Transferring the settings backed up

in the USB memory to the sensor
Transfers the setting data (batch backup file) saved
in the USB memory to the sensor.

connector of the monitor.

Installing/Removing the USB memory

(Page 6-18)

2 Display the USB Memory screen.

Displaying the USB Memory screen

(Page 6-18)

3 Tap the [Transfer Program Settings] button.

6
The confirmation dialog appears.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The screen to select the setting data opens.

5 Select the batch backup file to be

transferred (*.iva), and tap the [OK] button.

For details of selecting the files in the USB

memory, refer to
Selecting the file in the
USB memory (Page 3-17).
The Transfer Program Settings screen opens.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-21

Useful Features/Various Functions

yyOperations cannot be cancelled during

transmission of the settings data.
yyIt is recommended to back up the data saved in
the sensor in a batch beforehand.
Saving the sensor settings or the image
history (Page 6-19)
yyThe image data in the image history will not be
transferred.
yyThe settings file of a different model of the
sensor cannot be transferred.
yyThe settings data of auto focus type and
manual focus type can be transferred mutually.
However, when the settings data of a manual
focus type are transferred to an auto focus type,
the focusing position will be converted to the
default value.
yyWhen directly connecting the sensor to the PC,
the setting file of the sensor with the FTP client
function or a field network enabled cannot be
transferred.
yyWhen the FTP client function or field network
function is enabled, the setting data cannot be
transferred to the sensor during running.

1 Connect the USB memory to the USB

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory

6 If you would also like to transfer the I/O

polarity (NPN/PNP) and the network settings,

touch the Option button.

7 Confirm the information of the settings file

to be transferred and tap the [Go] button.
After the transmission of the settings data
is completed, the transmission result will be
displayed on the monitor.
When the protocol setting has been changed,
the connection is terminated and the sensor
restarts.

The Option screen opens.

Select [Enable] in [Transfer All Settings] and tap
the [OK] button.

8 Confirm the transmission result and tap

the [OK] button.

The system returns to the run screen or the

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Useful Features/Various Functions

When [Transfer All Settings] has been set to

[Enable], the system returns to the Monitor
Settings screen.

yyWhen the FTP client function is set to

[Enable], the image history will be cleared.
yyThe number of images which can be saved
to the image history when using the FTP
client function are as follows.
- Color type.................. 70 images
- Monochrome type...... 210 images
yyThe setting of [Transfer All Settings] is reset
to [Disable] after the setting data were
transferred or when the setting is canceled.
yyWhen the PROFINET communication is
being used, the sensor restarts.

6-22

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory

Capturing the monitor screen and

saving to the USB memory
Saves the run screen or settings screen of the
monitor into the USB memory as an image file (BMP).
The saved image files can be imported into the PC
and used as an image for creating reports.

Enabling the screen capturing function

Capturing the screen

1 Enable the screen capture function.

Enabling the screen capturing function

(Page 6-23)

2 Display the screen to be captured and

tap the title area at the upper part of the

screen for about one second.

1 Connect the USB memory to the USB

connector of the monitor.

Installing/Removing the USB memory

(Page 6-18)

Displaying the USB Memory screen

(Page 6-18)

3 Tap the [Screen Capture Settings] button.

4 Select the [Enable] and tap the [OK] button.

The capture will be executed and the completion

message appears for a few seconds.
yyEach setup screen can be captured by tapping
the title area.
yyFor the full-screen mode, tap the area where the
zooming rate is displayed.
yyWhen the screen which displays the taken
image is captured, the three types of file (screen
capture (bmp), raw image (bmp), image capture
file (ivp)) are saved at the same time.
yyFor details of the saved folder or file name, refer
to
Folder composition and file naming rules
(Page 6-24).
yyIn some cases, such as when choice items of a
pulldown menu are being displayed or during file
processing, screens cannot be captured.

The system returns to the run screen or the

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-23

Useful Features/Various Functions

2 Display the USB Memory screen.

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory

Folder composition and file naming rules

Data type

Batch backup

Storage
folder

\(Device name of the sensor)_

(Last 24bit of the MAC address)

File name

YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *1

Extension

iva

Reference
page

Batch saves all the

settings in the sensor.
[Program Only] or
[Prog.+Image Hist.] can be
selected.

6-19

yyScreen capture
(with taken
images)
File name
yyIndividual image
history storage Extension

\(Device name of the sensor)_

Simultaneously saves the
(Last 24bit of the MAC address)\ bmp format file for the
IMAGE
taken image and the ivp
format file which can be
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *1
used for master image
bmp
registration or Tool Auto
Tuning.
ivp

Storage
yyScreen capture folder
yyIndividual image
history storage
File name

yyWhen the sensor is connected

\(Device name of the sensor)_
(Last 24bit of the MAC
Saves an image that the
address)\SCREEN
displayed screen has been
yyWhen the sensor is not
captured as it is including
connected
the title area and the
\IV-M30
buttons.
1
YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *

Extension

bmp

Storage
folder

\(Device name of the sensor)_

(Last 24bit of the MAC address)

File name

Paa_Tbb_(Tool name) *2

Extension

ivt

Storage
folder

Description

Storage Rule

Useful Features/Various Functions

Tool Auto Tuning

Saves images and criteria

information of Tool Auto
Tuning.

6-20
6-23

6-23

5-28

*1 YYYY: Year; MM: Month; DD: Day; hh: Hour; mm: Minute; ss: Second
For individually saving the batch backup and image history, the file name can be changed to arbitrary
name and saved.
*2 aa: Program number (00 to 31), bb: Tool number (01 to 16), Tool name: The tool name which has been
set will be applied as a tool name if the tool name has been set. The tool type will be applied as a tool
name if the tool name if the tool name has not been set.

yyThe numbers of files to be saved in each folder must be 100 files or less.
Files may not be saved correctly.
For the folder with the number of files over 100 files, delete the files and change the folder name.
yyThe total numbers of sub folders and files in each folder (iva files or ivp files) that can be displayed on
the screen to select a file (Page 3-17) is 128.
yyIf characters which cannot be displayed correctly with the current display language (Page 6-51) are
included in the folder or file names, the folders or files will be save with those characters replaced by
hyphens (-).
6-24

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Sensor advanced settings

Setup Adjustment

The section explains the Sensor Advanced screen

displayed by tapping [Sensor Advanced] in the
Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Tilt Correction
zz
Performs tilt correction of the images displayed on
the monitor.
Tilt Correction (Page 6-38)

Rotate 180
zz
Rotates the display of the monitor 180.
Rotate 180 (Page 6-40)

White Balance (for color type only)

zz

Program
Program Switch Method
zz
Sets the switching method for programs.
Program Switch Method (Page 6-42)

Environmental

Auto Focus Adj Pos

zz

I/O Settings
zz
Sets the input/output settings, specifies the
polarity, and sets the I/O monitor.
I/O Settings (Page 6-26)

Sets whether or not to share the adjusting

position for auto focus to all programs.
Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus
type only) (Page 6-42)

Device Name/Pass
zz
Sets the sensor name and password lock.
Device settings (Page 6-29)

Network Settings
zz
Sets the network settings for the sensor.
Network Settings (Page 6-31)

Adv. Network Settings

zz
Sets the FTP client function and the field
network settings for the sensor.
Advanced Network Settings (Page 6-32)

System
Sensor Information
zz
Displays the information set in the sensor.
Sensor Information (Page 6-43)

Initialize Sensor
zz
Initializes the information set in the sensor.
Initializing the sensor (Page 6-44)

Update Sensor
zz
Upgrades the sensor software.
Updating the sensor (Page 6-44)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-25

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

Adjusts the white balance for the image displayed

on the monitor.
White Balance (for color type only)
(Page 6-41)

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

I/O Settings

Input Settings

Sets the input/output settings for the sensor.

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the

1 Tap the [Settings] button of the input settings.

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

2 Tap the [Environmental] button and then

the [I/O Settings] button.

2 Set the input settings for the sensor.

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

3 Set the input/output settings for the

sensor.

IN1
zz
Sets the detection timing of the trigger input for
IN1 input line.
yyExt. Trigger
Sets the trigger input to the rising edge of the
external trigger.

Input Settings (Page 6-26)

Output Settings (Page 6-27)
Polarity (Page 6-28)
I/O Monitor (Page 6-28)

yyExt. Trigger
Sets the trigger input to the falling edge of the
external trigger.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.

IN2 to IN6
zz

Sets the roles for input line IN2 to IN6.

yyOFF
Ignores the input.
yyProgram bit0 to bit4
Specifies the number for switching the programs.
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
(Page 6-8)
yyClear Error
Sets the error output clearance.
yyExt. Master Save
Sets the master image registration from the
external input.

6-26

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Option
zz

Common Output Settings

zz

The input option screen opens by tapping the

[Option] button.

The screen to select the output type opens by

tapping the [Common Output Settings] button.
Changing the timing of the status output (Page 7-6)
[Latching]
Outputs the result along with the judgment
condition of the sensor.

3 After the setting is completed, tap the

6
[One-Shot]
Sets the one-shot time and ON-delay time in
which output the status output with one-shot.

[Close] button.

The system returns to the I/O Settings screen of

the sensor.

Output Settings

1 Tap the [Settings] button of the Output Settings.

yyOne-Shot ON Time
Specifies the flash width of the one-shot within
1 to 1000 msec.
yyON-Delay Time
Specifies the ON-delay time of the one-shot
flash within 0 to 5000 msec.

2 Set the Output Settings of the sensor.

For details of settings by the slider or inputting

value, refer to
Editing the value with the
slider (Page 3-14).

3 After the setting is completed, tap the

[Close] button.

The system returns to the I/O Settings screen of

the sensor.

OUT1 to OUT4
zz
Specifies the output format of the output line
with [N.O] or [N.C].
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-27

Useful Features/Various Functions

[Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save?]

Selecting the [Yes] button writes the data to
the ROM of the sensor when the master image
registration is performed with the external input
or field network.
Registering the Master Image (Page 7-8)

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Polarity

I/O Monitor

1 Select the [NPN] or [PNP] under Polarity.

Whether or not the I/O line for control is correctly

wired can be confirmed.

1 Tap the [Go] button in the I/O Monitor.

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

yyNPN
Output circuit.....NPN open collector
Input circuit........No-voltage input
yyPNP
Output circuit.....PNP open collector
Input circuit........Voltage input
Cables (Page 2-12)

2 Set the I/O Monitor settings.

2 Tap the [OK] button.

The confirmation dialog appears.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.

Input
zz
Displays the input status of external input in
real time. Whether or not the ON/OFF output
from the PLC is being correctly input can be
confirmed.

Output
zz
Tap the [ON] button to turn ON the each OUT
output. Tap the [OFF] button to turn them OFF.
Confirm that the PLC or the display lamp is
correctly output.

3 After the setting is completed, tap the

[Close] button.

The system returns to the I/O Settings screen of

the sensor.

6-28

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Device settings

Device Name

Sets the sensor name and password lock.

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then

the [Device Name/Pass] button.

The sensor can be arbitrary named and controlled.

When the [Edit] button is tapped, the dialog to enter
a device name opens.
Enter the arbitrary name and tap the [OK] button.

3 Set the device settings of the sensor.

For details of how to enter characters, refer to
Inputting characters (Page 3-16).

Device Name (Page 6-29)

Password Lock (Page 6-30)

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-29

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

yyIf the display language (Page 6-51) is changed,

the device name might be replaced and
displayed as hyphens (-).
yyTo use the PROFINET function, use only a-z,
0-9, -, and .. For the setting details, refer to
IV Series Users Manual (Field Network).
yyWhen you changed the device name while the
PROFINET communication is being used, the
sensor restarts.

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Password Lock
Sets the password to the sensor to prevent the
incorrect operation.
Correctly use the password lock of the sensor and
the touch screen lock of the monitor (Page 6-50).

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

yyTo enable the password lock, open the run screen.

yyTo disable, input the password when the input
dialog for the password to disable appears.
yyDuring the password lock, editing the Sensor
Setup is locked ([Sensor Setup] button/[Trig]
button on the run screen, threshold adjustment,
image history view (if unable to log in), clearing
the image history, Transfer Program Settings).
yyIf the password lock is temporarily cancelled in
the menu ON screen (Page 5-4), the lock is
cancelled until the system turns to the menu OFF
screen (Page 5-4).

1 Tap the [Settings] button under Security.

2 Select [ON] and tap the [Edit] button.

3 Set a desired password in the password

settings screen.

yyDefault: None (blank)

yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer
to
Inputting characters (Page 3-16).

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The password confirmation dialog appears.

5 Enter the password set in step 3 and tap

the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Security screen.

6 Tap the [Close] button.

The password will be changed and the system

returns to the Device Name/Pass screen.

6-30

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

3 Sets the network address of the sensor.

Network Settings
Sets the network of the sensor.

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then

the [Network Settings] button.

MAC Address
zz
Displays the MAC address of the sensor. The
MAC address cannot be changed.

IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway

zz
Displays the address for each network.
Tapping the [Edit] button opens the screen to
edit the address.
Set the desired address and tap the [OK] button.
For the port number setting, perform it on the
editing screen for the IP address.

[Reset] button
zz
Tapping the [Reset] button resets the IP Address /
Subnet Mask / Default Gateway.
Empty will be displayed after the reset.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

yyIf connected directly, the system returns to the

Sensor Advanced screen.
yyIf connected to the network, terminate the
connection to the sensor and reconnect it. If
the reconnection is successful, the Sensor
Setup Menu screen will be displayed. If the
reconnection fails, the Monitor Settings screen
will be displayed.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-31

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

yyFor details of the monitor's network settings,

refer to
Network Settings (Page 6-48).
yyThe settings are not required for direct connection.
yyHow to use the network setting
yyThe IP address of the sensor connected to the
network can be changed.
yyThe network settings of the sensor can be
initialized.
The settings can also be initialized using the
IP reset switch (Page A-40) of the sensor.
yyTo set the IP address before connecting to
the network, it can be set by connecting the
monitor and sensor directly.
yyWhen you changed the device name while the
PROFINET communication is being used, the
sensor restarts.

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Advanced Network Settings

Sets the FTP client function and the field network
settings for the sensor.

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the

FTP
Automatically transfers the image data and status
result information saved in the sensor memory to
an FTP server.

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Data transfer via FTP

LAN

2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then

the [Adv. Network Settings] button.

FTP client

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

The Adv. Network Settings screen opens.

3 Sets the Advanced Network Settings of

the sensor.

FTP server

yyTo use the FTP client function, select [Network

Connection] for the connection setting of the
sensor. During the direct connection, the setting
item is shaded and cannot be selected.
yyIf data are not transferred properly with the FTP
client function, refer to
Remedy when data
transfer via FTP is unavailable (Page A-38).

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the FTP.

FTP (Page 6-32)

Field Network (Page 6-37)

4 After the setting is completed, tap the

[Close] button.

The system returns to the Sensor Advanced

screen.

6-32

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

2 Tap the [ON] button in FTP Client.

3 Sets the FTP setting of the sensor.

FTP Destination Settings (Page 6-33)

Transfer Condition Settings (Page 6-34)
Transfer Destination Folder Settings (Page 6-35)

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the Adv. Network Settings

screen.

FTP Destination Settings

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the FTP

Destination.

IP Address
zz
Displays the IP address of the FTP server.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the IP Address
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button.
yyThe port number setting can be done on the
edit screen of IP Address.
yyDefault port number : 21

User Name
zz
Input the user name for logging in to the FTP
server.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the User Name
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button.
yyDefault: None (blank)
yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer
to
Inputting characters (Page 3-16).

Password
zz
Input the password for logging in to the FTP
server.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the Password
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary password and tap the [OK]
button.

The FTP Destination screen opens.

yyDefault: None (blank)

yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer
to
Inputting characters (Page 3-16).

Passive Mode
zz
To use the passive mode, tap the [Enable] button.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-33

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

yyWhen the FTP client function is set to

[Enable], the image history will be cleared.
yyThe number of images which can be saved
to the image history when using the FTP
client function are as follows.
yyColor type................. 70 images
yyMonochrome type..... 210 images

2 Set the network address of the FTP server.

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

3 Tap the [Connection Test] button to

test the connection with the connection

destination.

The connection test is performed and the result

window opens.

Transfer Condition Settings

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the Transfer

Condition.

The Transfer Condition screen opens.

Useful Features/Various Functions

2 Set the file transfer conditions.

If [Successfully connected.] is displayed, the

setting is completed.
When the test is executed, the connection with
the FTP server, folder creating at the transfer
destination, and data file creating are tested.
When the connection cannot be done properly,
deal with the problem in accordance with the
cause of connect failure displayed on the
result window.
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is
unavailable (Page A-38)

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the FTP Destination

screen.

5 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen of the

FTP Settings.

6-34

Transfer Condition
zz
Selects the transfer condition of image data.
yyAll......................Transfers all the images that
are judged.
yyNG Only............Transfers all the images whose
total status results are NG.
yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
adjust the processing time so that all the
images can be transferred.
yyWhen the transfer could not be done on
time, the data are saved in the internal
buffer. The internal buffer can save images
up to 30 images.
yyImage data are transferred in the sequence that
they have been saved to the internal buffer.
yyWhen the remaining capacity of the internal
buffer is insufficient, an FTP error occurs and
the image data transfer fails.
yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
confirm that there is sufficient storage area
on the FTP server.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

File Format
zz

Selects the file saving format for image data.

yyIVP
Transfers the image data as the format which
can be opened by IV-Navigator. Operation
results can be confirmed in the simulator
function by using the transferred image data.
Moreover, the image data can be converted to
the BMP format by using the IVP-Converter.
yyBMP
Transfers the image data as the format which
can be opened by other applications.

Transfer Destination Folder Settings

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the Transfer

Destination Folder.

Transfer Judgment Results

zz

The Transfer Destination Folder screen opens.

2 Specify the transfer destination folder of

FTP server.

The example for displaying the saved results

file with Microsoft Excel is as follows.

Folder
zz

FTP Error
zz

To turn ON the error output function for when a

file transfer failed, select [Enable].
When this item is set to [Enable], the
followings occur if a file transfer fails.
yyThe following error messages are displayed
in response to the causes of failure.
- FTP Connection Error
- FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed)
- FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer)
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is
unavailable (Page A-38)
yyThe error output function turns ON.
yyThe indicator light of the sensor blinks in red.
yyIf FTP Transfer Error has occurred while
the sensor is running, the error condition will
continue until the error is cleared.

3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen of the

FTP Settings.

Specifies the transfer destination folder of FTP server.

Set an arbitrary folder name.
yyInput is not necessary if the image data is to
be transferred to the root folder.
yyTo specify a subfolder, break it with / (onebyte slash).
yyIf the specified folder does not exist, a new
folder will be created.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the Folder
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary folder name and tap the [OK] button.
yyDefault: None (blank). Up to 16 characters
can be set.
yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer
to
Inputting characters (Page 3-16).
yy/ (one-byte slash), . (one-byte point) and
(one-byte space) cannot be used as the
first nor last letter of the folder name.
yy/ (one-byte slash) cannot be used multiple
times in a row.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-35

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

To transfer judgement results simultaneously

with the image data, select [Enable].
Judgement results are transferred as a tab
delimited text.

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

File Name
zz

Create Subfolder
zz

Sets the file name of the transfer files.

When the [Edit] button is tapped, the File Name
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary file name and tap the [OK] button.

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

yyDefault: None (black). Up to 16 characters

can be set.
yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer
to
Inputting characters (Page 3-16).
yyThe transfer file naming rule is as follows.
xxxxxx_AAAAA_BB_CC.DDD
yyxxxxxx.......The file name which has been
set (up to 16 characters)
yyAAAAA......A sequence number for each
FTP transfer (5 digits which
zero suppression is not used).
Promptly after startup, 00000
is displayed.
yyBB.............The program number (2 digits
which zero suppression is not
used)
yyCC.............The total status result
(OK or NG)
yyDDD..........The extension (ivp or bmp)
yyIf there is a file with the same name at
the transfer destination, that file will be
overwritten. When you transfer image data
from multiple IV series, specify different
transfer destinations so that the image data
are not overwritten accidentally.
yyIf the transfer destination folder is read only
or is opened, an FTP error will occur and the
image data transfer will fail.

Index Upper Limit

zz
Sets the upper limit of the number of image
data which can be transferred to the transfer
destination folder.

To create subfolders under the transfer

destination folder, select [ON].
yyThe subfolder naming rule is as follows.
IVxxxxx
(xxxxx is a sequence number created
every time the sensor is restarted or the
FTP settings are changed.)
yyWhen subfolders were created, the folder
structure is as follows.
Root folder
Transfer destination folder
Subfolder
0000
0001
0002
When the file index quantity reaches the index
upper limit, the folder of the next sequence
number is created.

yyThe default of subfolders is IV00001.

yyThe upper limit is IV99999. When the upper
limit has been reached, the count continues
by returning to IV00000.
yyThe subfolder name cannot be initialized.
yyThe upper limit of the count number of folders
in the subfolder is 9999. When the number
is over the upper limit, the transfer stops.

3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the main screen of the

FTP Settings.

When the file index quantity has reached the

index upper limit, as follows.
yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [ON],
the folder of the next sequence number is
created.
yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [OFF],
the file index quantity returns to 0.

6-36

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Field Network
Communicates with a PLC via a field network and the status result, etc., can be input to the PLC as
communication data.
For the communication protocol, EtherNet/IP and PROFINET can be selected.

Host device such as PLC

(EtherNet/IP, PROFINET master unit)

6
EtherNet/IP, PROFINET adapter

yyTo use the field network function, select [Network Connection] for the connection setting of the sensor.
During the direct connection, the setting item is shaded and cannot be selected.
yyWhen the protocol setting has been changed, the connection is terminated and the sensor restarts.
IV Series Users Manual (Field Network).
yyFor the details of the field network function, refer to

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the Field

Network.

2 Select the protocol.

3 To enable the handshake control, select

[Enable].

When the protocol is set as [Disable], this

setting item is shaded and cannot be selected.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the Adv. Network Settings

screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-37

Useful Features/Various Functions

Sensor

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Tilt Correction
If the sensor cannot be installed in the front of the target due to the installation restrictions of the sensor
and target and/or to prevent a shine on the targets surface, the image of the target may be trapezoidally
distorted.
The tilt correction corrects these images and displays them without distortion.
Vertical correction

Horizontal correction

Indicator light

Top view

Top view

Useful Features/Various Functions

Target

Target

Indicator light

Target

Target

Lateral view

Before tilt correction

6-38

Lateral view

After tilt correction

(vertical)

Before tilt correction

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

After tilt correction

(horizontal)

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button and

then the [Tilt Correction] button.

Vertical
zz
Performs a tilt correction in the vertical direction.
Slide the slider to [+] or [-] to correct the display
of the vertical direction of the taken image.

Before correction

After correction

Before correction

<Image of vertical correction>

Horizontal
zz
Performs a tilt correction in the horizontal direction.
Slide the slider to [+] or [-] to correct the display
of the horizontal direction of the taken image.

The information screen opens.

piece of paper printed with square grids.

Before correction

After correction

Before correction

<Image of horizontal correction>

5 Perform the tilt correction.

yyIf the quality of the taken image displayed on

the monitor is poor, tap the [Image Settings]
button to adjust the taken image.
The following adjustments can be made.
Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
Focus Adjustment (Page 4-12)
Advanced Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-18)
Lighting (Page 4-18)
yyMake sure the target fits within the imaging
area after tilt correction. The imaging area
after the tilt correction may have become
narrower than before the correction by the tilt
correction.

6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

OFF
zz
Tilt correction is not performed.

After performing a tilt correction, a message

prompting you to re-register the master image
appears.
Re-register the master image after the [OK]
button is tapped.
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
as a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)
The system returns to the sensor advanced screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-39

Useful Features/Various Functions

3 Tap the [OK] button.

4 Image a target to be a reference such as a

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

3 Image a desired target.

Rotate 180
The image of a target may be rotated 180 and
displayed due to the installation restrictions of the
sensor and target. The rotate 180 function rotates
the image displayed on the monitor 180.

Indicator light

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

If the quality of the taken image displayed on

the monitor is poor, tap the [Image Settings]
button to adjust the taken image.
The following adjustments can be performed.
yy Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
yy Focus Adjustment (Page 4-12)
yy Advanced Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-18)
yy Lighting (Page 4-18)

4 Tap the [ON] button.

The display of the monitor will be displayed with

the image rotated 180.

Target

Before rotate 180

correction

After rotate 180

correction

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button, and

then the [Rotate 180] button.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

yyAfter performing a rotate 180 correction, a
message prompting you to re-register the
master image appears.
Re-register the master image after the [OK]
button is tapped.
2. Master Registration (Registering an
Image as a Reference for Judgment)
(Page 4-20)
yyIf a tilt correction (Page 6-38) has also been
performed, confirm the tilt correction settings
after a rotate 180 correction.
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.

6-40

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

White Balance (for color type only)

Adjusts the white balance (color tint) of the built-in
camera of the sensor.

4 Image a white-colored target and tap the

[Go] button.

The white balance is adjusted by default.

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button, and

then the [White Balance] button.

After the white balance adjustment is completed,

the message "White balance complete." appears.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the White Balance screen.

The White Balance screen opens.

3 Tap the [Execute] button.

After performing a white balance adjustment,

a message prompting you to re-register the
master image appears.
Re-register the master image after the [OK]
button is tapped.
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
as a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.

To initialize the white balance which has been

set, tap the [Initialize] button and tap the [OK]
button on the confirmation dialog.
If the taken image displayed on the monitor is
not suitable for adjusting the white balance,
tap the [Image Settings] button to adjust
the taken image. Also, if the white balance
has been set to [Enable], the image will be
displayed with the white balance adjustment
applied.
The following adjustments can be performed.
yy Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-11)
yy Focus Adjustment (Page 4-12)
yy Advanced Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-18)
yy Lighting (Page 4-18)
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-41

Useful Features/Various Functions

6 Tap the [OK] button.

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Program Switch Method

Auto Focus Adjustment Position

(auto focus type only)

Sets the method for switching the program number.

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
(Page 6-8)

Sets whether or not to make the adjusting position

for the auto focus common to all programs.

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the

2 Tap the [Program] button and tap the

2 Tap the [Program] button and tap the [Auto

3 Set a program switch method.

3 Set an auto focus adjustment position.

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

[Program Switch Method] button.

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Focus Adj Pos] button.

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

yyMonitor/PC.........The program number is

switched by the monitor or IVNavigator (IV-H1) operation.
yyExternal IN........The program number is
switched by the external input.
To use the [External IN], any of the program
bit0 to bit4 must be assigned to any of the IN2
to IN6 in the input settings.
Input Settings (Page 6-26)

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

6-42

Common
zz
Sets the focus adjustment position common to
all programs. Select this when the focus position
of the target registered in each program is
common. The program can be quickly switched
because re-adjustment of the focusing position
will not be performed when the program number
is switched.

Individual
zz
Sets the focus adjustment position in each
program. Select this when the focus position
is different for each target registered in each
program. Re-adjusts the focusing position when
the program number is switched. Switching
programs takes longer in this option due to the
time needed to adjust the focusing position.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

The duration for the operation count of the

focusing function (program switch count)
is 100,000 times. If the focusing position
does not need to be changed for each
program, set the Auto Focus Adj Pos to
Common to extend its duration.

Sensor Information
Displays the information set in the sensor.
The model, version, serial number, MAC address,
IP address, and device name can be confirmed.

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the

Sensor Setup Menu screen.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] 2 Tap the [System] button and then the
button.
[Sensor Information] button.

When the auto focus adjustment position is set

to [Common], a message recommending reregistration of the master image appears.
Re-register the master image after the [OK]
button is tapped.
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
as a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-20)
The information set in the sensor will be displayed.

The monitor information (Page 6-53) can be

confirmed by tapping the [Monitor Information]
button at the lower left of the screen.

3 After the information is confirmed, tap the

[OK] button.

The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-43

Useful Features/Various Functions

The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Initializing the sensor

Initializes the information set in the sensor and sets
to the factory default.
For details of procedures, refer to
Initializing the
sensor (Page 3-12).
yyThe following settings will not be initialized.
yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 6-28)
yyNetwork Settings (Page 6-31)
yyUse the "Initialize monitor" function to initialize
the information set in the monitor.
Initializing the monitor (Page 3-13)

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

Updating the sensor

Updates the operation software of the sensor.
For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.
URL : http://www.keyence.com/

6-44

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information

Monitor Settings

Monitor Environment

The section explains the monitor settings displayed

by tapping the [Monitor Settings] button with the
state that the menu display of the monitor is set to
ON.

Language
zz
Selects the language to be displayed on the
monitor.
Language (Page 6-51)

Time
zz
Confirms or changes the time set in the monitor.
Time (Page 6-51)

Backlight
zz
Sets the backlight of the monitor.
Backlight (Page 6-52)

Adjusts the position to be touched of the

monitor.
Touch Panel Calibration (Page 6-52)

System
Monitor Information
zz
Displays the information set in the monitor.
Monitor Information (Page 6-53)

Sensor Connect
Performs the settings for connecting with the
sensor.
Sensor Connect (Page 6-46)

Initialize Monitor
zz
Initializes the information set in the monitor.
Initialize Monitor (Page 6-53)

Update Monitor
zz
Updates the software version of the monitor.
Displaying the Sensor Image History
screen (Page 6-14)

Monitor Device Settings

Network Settings
zz
Performs the network settings of the monitor.
Network Settings (Page 6-48)

Display Settings
zz
Performs the settings for the screens and
buttons to be displayed on the monitor.
Display Settings (Page 6-49)

Touch Screen Lock

zz
Sets to prevent the incorrect operation of the
monitor.
Touch Screen Lock (Page 6-50)
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-45

Useful Features/Various Functions

Touch Panel Calibration

zz

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information

Sensor Connect
Performs the settings for connecting with the sensor.
The setting method differs whether the monitor and
sensor are directly connected or connected via network.

When directly connecting with the sensor

1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the

state that the menu display of the monitor

is set to ON.

2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button.

yyIf the connection cannot be established, refer

to
Remedy when direct connection is
unavailable (Page A-28).
yyFor the direct connection, the IP address is
automatically set.
yyIf the PC is directly connected with the sensor
when the PROFINET function is being used,
the PROFINET function will stop. To use the
PROFINET function again, restart the sensor.

When connecting with the sensor via a

network

1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the

Useful Features/Various Functions

state that the menu display of the monitor

is set to ON.

2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button.

yyIf the monitor and sensor are connected directly,

the [Direct Connection] will be displayed.
yyPerform the procedure from step 3 only if an
IP address is displayed (network connected).

3 Tap the [Direct Connection] button and

tap the [OK] button.

When the monitor and the sensor are connected

via network, the [Network Connection] will be
displayed and the IP address of the connected
sensor will be displayed.

3 Tap the [Network Connection] button and

tap the [OK] button.

The confirmation dialog appears.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The monitor restarts.

After the restart, the run screen or the Sensor
Setup Menu screen opens.

6-46

The confirmation dialog appears.

yyIf the FTP client function is to be set to [ON],
select [Network Connection].
yyIf the field network is to be set to [EtherNet/IP]
or [PROFINET], select [Network Connection].

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The monitor restarts.

After the restart, the sensor connection setup
screen opens.

Searching for and connecting to sensors on

zz
the network

Tap the [Search Sensor] button.

yyBOOTP is used for assigning the IP address

to the sensor.
Settings after initialization (Page A-40)
yyThe search time is about 10 seconds.
yySearching range and retrievable number of
units are as follows.
yySensor with no IP address (default) :
A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved
within a range that the BOOTP packet from
the sensor reaches (Page A-40).
yySensor with IP address :
A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on
the local network to which the monitor is
connected.

Useful Features/Various Functions

The searched result will be displayed.

Select the sensor to be connected using the [<]
or the [>] button and tap the [Connect] button.

After connecting, the run screen or the Sensor

Setup Menu screen opens.
When a sensor without a set IP address is
selected and the [Connect] button is tapped,
the confirmation dialog appears.
The information dialog appears when the [OK]
button is tapped. The screen to set the sensor
network settings opens when the [OK] button
is tapped.
Tap the [Edit] button, set the IP address, the
subnet mask, and the default gateway, and
then tap the [Connect] button.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-47

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information

Specifying the IP address of and

zz
connecting to the sensor

Network Settings
Performs the settings of the network address of the
monitor.

Tap the [Specify Sensor] button.

1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the

state that the menu display of the monitor

is set to ON.

2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button,

and then the [Network Settings] button.

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

The screen to input the IP address of the sensor

to be connected opens.
Input the IP address of the sensor to be
connected and tap the [Connect] button.

3 Set the network address for the monitor.

yyWhen the [Ping Test] is tapped after the IP

address is input, you can confirm whether or
not a sensor with the specified IP address
exists on the network.
yyTo set a port number, set it using the [PORT]
button.
After connecting, the run screen or the Sensor
Setup Menu screen opens.
If the connection cannot be established, refer
to
Remedy when connection via a network
is unavailable (Page A-29).

MAC Address
zz
Displays the MAC address for the monitor. The
MAC address cannot be changed.

IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway

zz
Tapping the [Edit] button displays the screen to
edit the address.
Set the arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The message "Monitor will be restarted." appears.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The monitor restarts.

After the restart, the run screen opens.

6-48

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information

Display Settings
Sets the display method of the screens or messages
to be displayed on the monitor.

1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the

state that the menu display of the monitor

is set to ON.

2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button,

and then the [Display Settings] button.

6
Useful Features/Various Functions

3 Set the individual display item.

Manual Trigger
zz

Sets to enable/disable the [Trig] button in the

run screen when the Trigger Options are set to
[External].
Names and Functions of the Operation
Screen (Page 5-4)
The [Trig] button displayed in the settings
screen cannot be set to hidden.

Update Image in RUN Mode

zz

Sets the display to ON/OFF for the taken image

to be displayed on the monitor. Usually the setting
is set to ON.

Tool Auto Tuning Guide

zz

Sets the Tool Auto Tuning Guide to show/hide.

The display automatically turns OFF by tapping the
[Hide Next] button in the Tool Auto Tuning Guide.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the Monitor Settings screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-49

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information

6 Enter the password set in step 4 and tap

Touch Screen Lock

Sets the password on the monitor to prevent
misoperation of the touch panel.
yyTo enable the touch screen lock, turn the screen to
the menu OFF screen on the run screen (Page 5-4).
yyTo disable it, tap the [Menu] button and input the
password.
yyDuring the touch screen lock, operations other
than the tool selection and image capture are
locked.

1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the

state that the menu display of the monitor

is set to ON.

Useful Features/Various Functions

2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button

and then the [Touch Screen Lock] button.

the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Touch Screen Lock

screen.

7 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Monitor Settings

screen.

For efficiently using the touch screen lock and

password lock (Page 6-30),
yyThe touch screen lock function locks the touch
screen operation of the monitor to prevent
misoperations of the monitor and the sensor
connected to the monitor.
yyThe password lock function locks the sensor
settings. It does not lock the operations and
settings of the monitor.
yyTo lock editing the sensor settings with multiple
monitors or the IV-Navigator (IV-H1), use the
password lock function. It cannot protect from
the misoperations by the monitor or IV-Navigator
(IV-H1) that the touch screen lock is not applied.
Password Lock (Page 6-30)

3 Select [Enable] and tap the [Edit] button.

4 Set the arbitrary password in the

password settings screen.

yyDefault: None (blank)

yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer to
Inputting characters (Page 3-16).

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The password confirmation dialog appears.

6-50

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information

Language

Time

Selects the language to be displayed on the monitor.

1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the

state that the menu display of the monitor

is set to ON.

2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and

then the [Language] button.

Sets the date and time of the monitor.

yyThis setting is adjusted by default.
yyThe date and time information are used for
saving files into the USB memory.

1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the

state that the menu display of the monitor

is set to ON.

2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and

then the [Time] button.

Useful Features/Various Functions

3 Select the button of the language to be

displayed on the monitor and tap the [OK]

button.

3 Set the date and time of the monitor.

The information screen opens.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The monitor restarts.

After the restart, the display language will be
switched to the selected language and the run
screen opens.

Regarding the display of the characters in device

names (Page 6-29) and program names (Page 6-12)
yyCharacters which cannot be display with
the language after change are replaced and
displayed as hyphens (-).
yyIf the device or program name has not been changed
after you changed a language, those name can be
displayed as they were in the previous language once
you change back a language into the previous one.
yyIf the device or program name has been changed
after the language change, it will remain replaced
by hyphens (-) and the former information will be
erased when the language is changed back.

yyMove the input cursor to the item to set by the

[] or [] button and enter the numbers.
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of
the selected item.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the Monitor Settings screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-51

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information

Backlight

Touch Panel Calibration

Sets the backlight of the monitor.

Adjusts the position to be touched of the touch panel.

The monitor recovers from dim mode when the

touch panel is operated or when an error occurs

1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the

state that the menu display of the monitor

is set to ON.

2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and

then the [Backlight] button.

Useful Features/Various Functions

3 Set the backlight of the monitor.

This setting is adjusted by default.

1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the

state that the menu display of the monitor

is set to ON.

2 Tap the [Monitor Enviroment] button and tap

the [Touch Panel Calibration] button.

The confirmation dialog appears.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

The screen switches to the screen to adjust the

position to be tapped.

4 Follow the message displayed on the

monitor and tap the center of the cross

mark ( ) in order.

Backlight Brightness
zz

Adjusts the brightness of the backlight.

The brightness can be adjusted between level 1 to 7
(default : 5).

Auto Off
zz

Selects the [Enable]/[Disable] for the Auto Off

function.

Auto Off Time Delay

zz

This is available when the [Enable] is selected for

the Auto Off function. Sets the time delay of the
monitor to be dimmed. Also, after 30 minutes since
the monitor being dimmed, the monitor turns off.
Options: 30 sec/1 min/5 min/10 min/30 min

After the adjustment for the positions to be tapped

is completed, the message "Touch panel calibration
completed. Touch the screen to exit." appears.

5 Tap the monitor.

The system returns to the Monitor Settings screen.

4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.

The system returns to the Monitor Settings screen.

6-52

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information

Monitor Information

Initialize Monitor

Displays the information set in the monitor.

Displays the model, version, serial number, MAC
address, and IP address.

1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the

state that the menu display of the monitor

is set to ON.

2 Tap the [System] button and then the

[Monitor Information] button.

Initializes the information set in the monitor and set

to the factory default.
For details of procedures, refer to
Initializing the
monitor (Page 3-13).
yyThe following settings will not be initialized.
yyLanguage (Page 6-51)
yyTime (Page 6-51)
yyUse the "Initialize Sensor" function to initialize
the information set in the sensor.
Initializing the sensor (Page 3-12)

The information set in the monitor will be

displayed.

Updates the operation software of the monitor.

For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.
URL : http://www.keyence.com/

The sensor information (Page 6-43) can be

confirmed by tapping the [Sensor Information]
button at the lower left of the screen.

3 After the information is confirmed, tap the

[OK] button.

The system returns to the Monitor Settings

screen.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

6-53

Useful Features/Various Functions

Update Monitor

Setting the Advanced Monitor Information

MEMO

6
Useful Features/Various Functions
6-54

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

7


Controlling with
Input/Output Line

This chapter explains how the input / output

terminal controls each operation.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

7-1

7
Controlling with the Input/Output Line

Controlling Timing of Judgment with

Triggers...............................................................7-2
Importing the Status Output..............................7-4
Changing Over....................................................7-7
Registering the Master Image...........................7-8
Clearing Errors.................................................7-10
Operations when Power of
the Sensor is Turned on...................................7-11
Input Response Time.......................................7-12

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

For details of the trigger, refer to

Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8).

External trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [External], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of
inputting the external trigger input.
Trigger 1

Trigger 2

Min
100 s

External trigger input

ON
OFF

Trigger 3

Trigger 4

Min 1.2 ms

(5)

(1)
Processing time

BUSY output

ON
OFF

Judgment process
(internal)

7
Controlling with the Input/Output Line

Total status output

Status output of each tool
Position adjustment output
Output of each logic
Trigger error output

(2)
Max 2 ms

(3)
Trigger delay

ON
OFF

Min 0.2 ms

Previous result

Result from Trigger 1

(4)

Result from Trigger 2

Result from Trigger 4

Max 2 ms

ON
OFF

(1) Positions the target and inputs external trigger. The shortest input time is 100 s for ON, and 1.2 ms for
OFF.
(2) BUSY output function turns ON. Processing time differs depending on the settings.
(3) After the trigger delay time (Page 4-8) elapses, the target is imaged and the judgment process is
performed.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is
turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.
(5) If the external trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error
occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output
Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [ON].
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.]
: Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe ON status of each input indicates 0 V line is shorted when the Polarity (Page 6-28) is NPN, and
indicates that voltage is applied within the 0 V line when the Polarity is PNP.
yyThe edge trigger for activating timing or in deactivating timing can be set for the external trigger input.
Input Settings (Page 6-26)
yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared,
when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to
[One-Shot], refer to
Changing the timing of the status output (Page 7-6).

7-2

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

Internal trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [Internal], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of set
trigger interval.
Internal trigger

Trigger 1

(1)

Trigger 2

Trigger interval

Trigger interval

Processing time

BUSY output

ON
OFF

Trigger error output

Trigger 4

Trigger interval

Trigger 5

Trigger interval

(5)

(2)
(3)

Judgment process
(internal)
Total status output
Status output of each tool
Position adjustment output
Output of each logic

Trigger 3

Min 0.2 ms

ON
OFF

Previous result

Result from Trigger 1

Result from Trigger 2

Result from Trigger 4

(4)

ON
OFF

(2) BUSY output function turns ON at the timing that internal trigger occurred. Processing time differs
depending on the settings.
(3) The target is imaged and judged. No trigger delay settings.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is
turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.
(5) If the internal trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error
occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output
Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [ON].
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared,
when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to
[One-Shot], refer to
Changing the timing of the status output (Page 7-6).
Set the trigger interval longer than the processing time. If the trigger interval is shorter than the processing
time, the internal trigger will be input during the processing time, so the trigger error will occur.

Operating in the shortest cycle

To input the internal trigger in the shortest cycle and perform the judgment process, set the trigger input to
1 ms. Also, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment of Settings Navigator (Page 4-60) to [OFF] and
ignore the trigger error.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

7-3

Controlling with the Input/Output Line

(1) Inputs internal trigger in the trigger interval being set.

Importing the Status Output

Importing the Status Output

Imports the status output assigned to output line of power I/O cable. For details on assigning to output line,
refer to
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60).

Importing the total status / total status NG output

Total status results of multiple detection tools and position adjustments for the examined target can be
checked.
External trigger/Internal
trigger

Trigger 1
Processing time

White line: OUT 2

Assign the BUSY output
Black line: OUT 1
Assign the total status/
total status NG output

ON
OFF
Min 0.2 ms

ON
OFF

Previous total status result

Total status result of Trigger 1

Controlling with the Input/Output Line

yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the
Changing the timing of the status output (Page 7-6).
output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to
yyThe total status output turns ON when the total status results were OK.
The total status NG output turns ON when the total status results were NG.
The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
yy[All Tools OK]
When all of the status results of the detection tools and the adjustment result of the position
adjustment result were OK, the total status result is OK.
yy[Any Tool OK]
When any of the status results of the detection tools except that of the position adjustment was OK,
the total status result is OK.
yy[Logic 1] to [Logic 4]
When the logical operation result of the set detection tools was OK, the total status result is OK.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF
when the program number is switched or external master image is registered.
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.

7-4

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Importing the Status Output

Importing the individual status output of each detection tool / logic

The individual status result of the detection tool and position adjustment for the examined target can be checked.
Trigger input

Trigger 1
Processing time

Black line: OUT 1

Assign the BUSY output

ON
OFF
Min 0.2 ms

ON

White line: OUT 2

Assign "Tool 1"

OFF

Gray line: OUT 3

Assign "Tool 2"

OFF

Orange line: OUT 4

Assign "Logic 1"

OFF

ON
ON

Previous result

Status result of Tool 1

Previous result

Status result of Tool 2

Previous result

Status result of Logic 1

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

7-5

7
Controlling with the Input/Output Line

yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-27) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the
output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to
Changing the timing of the status output (Page 7-6).
yyThis is an example when the status results of Tool 1, Tool 2, and Logic 1 are to be checked individually.
yyThe status output turns ON when the status result of each tool/logic was OK. Turns OFF when the result
was NG or --.
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF
when the program number is switched or external master image is registered.

Importing the Status Output

Changing the timing of the status output

The timing of status output can be selected from the [Latching] which links to judgment and [One-Shot]
which outputs for a certain time. For details on settings, refer to
Output Settings (Page 6-27).
External trigger/Internal
trigger
BUSY output

Trigger 1

Trigger 2

ON
OFF
Min 0.2 ms

Status output
(Latching output)
Status output
(One-Shot output)

ON
OFF
ON

Status result of Trigger 1

Previous status result

Status result of Trigger 1

OFF
Delay time

Status result of Trigger 2

Status result of Trigger 2

One-Shot ON Time

Delay time

One-Shot ON Time

yyIn case of [Latching], updates the output by linking with judgment.

yyIn case of [One-Shot], outputs in a set amount of time after the set delay time is passed.
yyWhen the program number is switched or the external master image is registered, the status output turns
OFF before each process is completed.

Controlling with the Input/Output Line

Cancelling One-Shot output

To use the One-Shot output function, the following condition needs to be met.
Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > One-Shot ON Time
If the above is not met, the following One-Shot output that occurs during the One-Shot outputting is
cancelled and is not output.
Trigger 1

External trigger/Internal
trigger
BUSY output

(1)
ON
OFF
ON

Internal process of Trigger

1

OFF

Internal process of Trigger

2

OFF

Judgment process

Trigger 2

Trigger input interval

(2)
Delay time

ON

One-Shot ON Time

(3)

Status result of Trigger 2 (internal)

Delay time

ON
OFF

Status result of Trigger 1 (internal)

One-Shot ON Time

Status result of Trigger 1

Delay time

One-Shot ON Time

(1) This is an example of what happens when the trigger input interval is shorter than the One-Shot ON Time.
(2) To perform the One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 1, the previous One-Shot output
is completed, so that outputting can be performed normally.
(3) To perform One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 2, the One-Shot output of Trigger 1
is output. Therefore, the output status of Trigger 2 will be cancelled and it will not be output.
yyIf the BUSY time is not constant, meet the following condition to use it. The system might be affected by
a fluctuating BUSY time.
BUSY time + Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > BUSY time + One-Shot ON Time
7-6

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Changing Over

Changing Over
Program functions can easily change over by reading out the judgment condition previously saved with the
input line. For details of program functions, refer to
Changeover for a Target ( Program Functions) (Page
6-8).
External trigger/Internal
trigger
Program bit0 to bit4
Input

Trigger 1

ON
OFF

(1)

Min 10 ms

(5)

PROG00

PROG01

Switching time

(4)

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

PROG00

PROG01

PROG02

Min 0 ms
Previous result

Result from Trigger 1

(3)

ON
OFF

(1) Keeps the Program bit0 to bit4 input by switching to the state of the program number to be switched.
Minimum input time is 10 ms.
When the [External IN] is selected in the Program Switch Method (Page 6-11)
(2) The BUSY output turns ON while switching the programs. Switching time differs depending on the settings.
(3) The output status (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the switching program is completed.
(4) If the program number is switched during the judgment process by the trigger input, the system cancels
the judgment process (result of Trigger 2 is not output). The switching process is delayed by the
canceling process. Delay is time differs depending on the settings.
(5) If the trigger occurs while switching the programs (during the BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a
trigger error occurs. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-60)
under the Settings Navigator to [ON]. In the case of a manual trigger, the trigger is processed after the
switching program is completed.
Input Response Time (Page 7-12).
yyFor details on T1 and T2, refer to
yyUse this function during an operation. Programs cannot be switched with the external input during setup.
yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared,
when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyIf the switched program is set to [Internal], the first timing for inputting the trigger after switching the
program fluctuates. A delay of one trigger interval may occur.
yyDo not use with the external master registration input at the same time. The sequence for switching
programs and external master registration process will vary.
yyThe response of an image displayed on the monitor might be delayed until after switching programs (BUSY
output OFF).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

7-7

Controlling with the Input/Output Line

Trigger error output

PROG02

Switching time (T1)

T2

Total status output

Status output of each tool
Position adjustment output
Output of each logic

Trigger 3

(2)

BUSY output

Program number

Trigger 2

Registering the Master Image

Registering the Master Image

The external master registration function can register the master image with using the input line. For details
on master image registration, refer to
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for
Judgment) (Page 4-20).
External trigger/Internal
trigger

(1) Trigger 1

(7) Trigger 2
Min 2 ms

(Min 2 ms)

External master registration

input

ON

(2)

OFF

Master image registration time (T3)

BUSY output
Judgment process
(internal)
Master image (internal)

7
Controlling with the Input/Output Line

Total status output

Status output of each tool
Position adjustment output
Output of each logic
Error output

ON

(3)

OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF

T4
Image of Trigger 1

(5)
Previous master image

Image of Trigger 1

(4)
Previous result

Result from Trigger 2

Result from Trigger 1

ON

(6) In case of failure

OFF

(1) Takes an image to be registered as a master image by the external trigger or internal trigger.
(2) If the BUSY output turns OFF, the external master registration input will be input. Minimum ON/OFF
input time is 2 ms.
(3) The BUSY output turns ON and the master registration starts. The master registration time differs
depends on the settings.
(4) The status output (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the master image
registration is completed.
(5) The image imaged in Trigger 1 will be registered as a master image.
(6) If the external image registration is failed, the error output turns ON. Check that the external master
image registration is succeeded with the error output. In case of failure, the image will not be updated
from the previous master image. The error output turns OFF when the external master image
registration is succeeded or by the clear error input.
(7) After the master image registration is completed, the judgment process is performed with the new
master image. Trigger 2 judges the target with using an image of Trigger 1 as a master image.

7-8

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Registering the Master Image

Input Response Time (Page 7-12).

yyFor details of T3 and T4, refer to
yyUse this function during an operation. The external master image registration cannot be performed during
setup.
yyIf the trigger occurs while registering the master image (during BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a
trigger error occurs. The trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when
the program is switched, or when the error is cleared. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in
the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings Navigator to [ON].
y
y If the external master registration input is input during the imaging process (BUSY) by the trigger, the
system cancels the judgment process (taken image will not be registered). After the process is canceled,
the image taken before cancellation is registered as a master image. The master image registration
process is delayed by the cancelling process. Delaying time differs depending on the settings.
yyDo not change over the programs at the same time as external master registration input is being performed.
The sequence of the external master registration and switching programs process will vary.

ROM writing
settings

Master image is registered externally

when power is turned OFF

Number of times that external

master image registration can
perform (duration)

Yes

The master image is not deleted.

The image can be used as a master image after
starting up the device next time.

100,000 times

No

The master image is deleted.

External master image registration needs to be
performed after starting up the device.

No limit

yyIf the setting for writing to ROM is set to [No], the image is written to ROM when the system is
in the settings mode. The master image is not deleted once the system is in the settings mode
before the power is turned OFF.
yyIf the setting is set to [Yes], do not turn OFF the power during the master registration time (T3).
Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

7-9

7
Controlling with the Input/Output Line

yyIf the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when
using Ext. Master Save?] of the input option to [No] to protect the nonvolatile memory of the
internal sensor. For details of settings, refer to
Input Settings (Page 6-26).

Clearing Errors

Clearing Errors
If an error targeted for clearing has occurred, outputting an error can be turned OFF by the clear error input.
Error occurred
(Min 2 ms)

Clear Error input

ON

Min 2 ms

(2)

OFF

T5

Error output

ON

(1)

OFF

Controlling with the Input/Output Line

(1) If an error occurred, the error output turns ON.

Error types which can be output are as follows.
yySystem error
yyStartup memory readout error
yyExternal master registration error
yyTrigger error
To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-60) under Settings
Navigator to [ON].
yyFTP error
To output the FTP error, set the FTP error within the FTP settings (Page 6-32) to [Enable].
(2) The error output can be turned OFF by the clear error input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms.
Errors which can be cleared are as follows.
yyExternal master registration error
yyTrigger error
yyFTP error
The system error/startup memory readout error cannot be cleared.
yyFor details on T5, refer to

7-10

Input Response Time (Page 7-12).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on

Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on

Operations when the power is turned ON are as follows. Check activation of the BUSY output when
starting operation.
Initializing
2 seconds or longer

Power (DC24V)

BUSY
20 ms or longer

RUN

OFF

Determine the
I/O settings

(2)

(3)

ON

Trigger

(4)

OFF
(5)

ON

OFF
(6)

ON
OFF

Total status output

Status output of each tool ON
Position adjustment output
OFF
Output of each logic

Min 0 ms

Min
0.2 ms

Min
0.2 ms

(1) After the power is turned ON, the I/O Settings (NPN or PNP and N.O. or N.C.) will be determined.
Operation for initial startup of the sensor (Page 3-11)
Polarity (Page 6-28)
Output Settings (Page 6-27)
(2) The program number will be determined. If the program switching condition (Page 6-42) is set to
[External IN], the program number is determined according to the inputting condition of the input line.
(3) BUSY output function turns ON.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to OFF, so no changes occur.
(4) The BUSY output turns OFF and the system starts to operate.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from ON to OFF.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
By checking the activation of the BUSY output, operation in N.O./N.C. can be checked.
(5) If the startup error is occurred, the error output turns ON during the BUSY status.
(6) The RUN output turns ON when the sensor is running with no system error occurring.
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 6-27) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe RUN output, BUSY output and error output will be output from the output line assigned in output
assignment for program numbers (Page 4-60) determined after the power is turned ON. If the outputs
are not being assigned, it will not be output.
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

7-11

Controlling with the Input/Output Line

RUN output

System error

(1)

Trigger

Error output

RUN

ON

Program number

BUSY output

Setting

Input Response Time

Input Response Time

The following response times are the typical examples (typ.). The response times may differ depending
on the settings or the image processing condition. Control by confirming the BUSY output for securing
from the affect of different response times.

Response time for the switch program input

T1 (Switch program time) = A + B + C + E + 50 [ms] (typ.)
T2 = 10 [ms] (typ.)

Response time for the external master registration input

T3 (Master registration time) = A + B + D + E + 50 [ms] (typ.)
T4 = 5 [ms] (typ.)

Response time for the error clear input

Controlling with the Input/Output Line

T5 = 5 [ms] (typ.)

Description for symbols

Symbols

Description

Time

Judgment process
cancelling time *

400 (800) [ms] (typ.)

Added when it is input during the judgment process.

Tool registration time *

Total of the "Registration time x Number of set tools" for following

each tool
Position adjustment : 100 (500) [ms] (typ.)
Outline
: 100 (500) [ms] (typ.)
Color area
: 100 [ms] (typ.)
Area
: 100 [ms] (typ.)

Auto focus position

adjustment time

860 [ms] (typ.)

Added only when auto focus-type sensor is used and the [Auto
Focus Adj Pos] (Page 6-42) is set to [Individual].

Nonvolatile memory
saving time

3,500 [ms] (typ.)

Added only when the [Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save?]
(Page 6-27) is set to [Yes].

Trigger delay time

Trigger delay setting time (0 to 1,000) [ms]

Added only when the [External] (Page 4-10) is selected for trigger
type.

* These are the times in case the version of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later.
The times for the version R1.00 are those inside ().

7-12

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

8


Specifications

This chapter explains the specifications and

dimensions of the sensor and monitor.

Specifications.....................................................8-2
Dimensions.........................................................8-6

8
Specifications

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

8-1

Specifications

Specifications
Sensor
Model

IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA

Standard range

Installed distance

50 to 500mm

Image sensor

1/3 inch
color CMOS

Exposure time

Amplifier type
Light

Specifications

Tool

Lighting
method
Type
Number*2

Switch settings
(programs)
Image
history*3

Manual

1/10 to 1/50,000

Auto*1

1/10 to 1/25,000

White LED

Manual

Auto*1

1/20 to 1/25,000

Red LED

Manual

Auto*1

1/10 to 1/25,000
Infrared LED

Pulse lighting/DC lighting is switchable

Outline search, Color area*7, Area*8, Position adjustment
Detection tools : 16 tools, Position adjustment tool : 1 tool
32 programs

Condition

NG only/All is selectable

Indicators

300 images*5

OFF/Statistics/Histograms is switchable
Statistics : Processing time (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs,
numbers of NGs, trigger numbers, trigger errors,
judge results list by tools
Histograms : Histogram, matching degree (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE),
numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs
HDR, HighGain, Color filters*7, Digital zoom*8, Brightness correction,
Tilt correction, White balance*7, Mask outline, Mask area, Test run,
ToolAutoTune, Input monitor, Output test, Security settings, Simulator*9
PWR/ERR, OUT, TRIG, STATUS, LINK/ACT
No-voltage input/voltage input is switchable
For no-voltage input : ON voltage 2V or lower, OFF current 0.1mA or lower, ON
current 2mA (short circuit)
For voltage input
: Maximum input rating 26.4V, ON voltage 15V or higher,
OFF current 0.2mA or lower, ON current 2mA (for 24V)

Input

Inputs
Function

8-2

Auto*1

100 images*4

Other functions

300 to 2000mm

752 (H) x 480 (V)

Manual

Numbers

Analysis information*6

50 to 150mm

1/3 inch
monochrome CMOS

Pixel
Focus adjustment

Long range

Installed distance Installed distance

50mm :
300mm :
12 (H) x 9 (V) mm 45 (H) x 33 (V) mm
to
to
Installed distance
Installed distance
150mm :
2000mm :
36 (H) x 27 (V) mm 300 (H) x 225 (V) mm

Installed distance 50 mm :
25 (H) x 18 (V) mm
to
Installed distance 500mm :
210 (H) x 157 (V) mm

View

Short range

6 inputs (IN1 to IN6)

IN1 : External trigger, IN2 to IN6 : Enable by assigning the optional functions
Assignable functions :

Program switching, Clear error, External master image registration
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Specifications

Model

IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA

Output

Open collector output NPN/PNP is switchable, N.O./N.C. is switchable

For open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA,
remaining voltage 1.5V or lower
For open collector PNP output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA,
remaining voltage 2V or lower

Ethernet*10

Outputs

4 outputs (OUT1 to OUT4)

Function

Enable by assigning the optional functions

Assignable functions :
Total judge result, RUN, BUSY, Error, Position adjustment result,
Judge result of each tool, Logical operation result of each tool

Standard

100BASE-TX/10BASE-T

Connector M12 4pin connector

Network function
Rating

Power
voltage

FTP client, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET

DC 24V 10% (including ripple)

Consumption
0.6A or less
current

Environmental
resistance

Relative
humidity

35 to 85%RH (No condensation)

Vibration

10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes

Specifications

Ambient
0 to +50C (No freezing)
temperature

Shock
500m/s2 6 different directions in 3 times
resistance
Enclosure
IP67
rating*11

Material

Main unit case : Aluminum die-casting, Packing : NBR, Front Cover : Acrylic,
Mounting adapter : POM

Weight

Approx. 270 g

*1 The focusing position can be automatically adjusted at the time of installation. Disabled during the
operation.
The focusing position can be registered by programs.
*2 Tools can be installed by programs.
*3 Saves to the memory in the sensor.
The images saved in the sensor can be backed up to the USB memory installed to the intelligent
monitor (IV-M30) or to the PC by the software for IV (IV-H1).
*4 70 images when using the FTP client function
*5 210 images when using the FTP client function
*6 This can be displayed on the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or by the IV software (IV-H1).
*7 Color type only.
*8 Monochrome type only.
*9 This function can be used with the software for IV (IV-H1).
*10 This is for connection with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the IV software (IV-H1).
*11 Except when the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/OP-87437) is mounted.
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

8-3

Specifications

Intelligent Monitor
Model

IV-M30

Display
Backlight
Touch panel

3.5" TFT color LCD 320 x 240 dot (QVGA)

Method

White LED

Duration

Approx. 50,000 hours (25 C)

Method

Analog resistive

Actuating force

0.8N or lower

Indicators
Ethernet*1

PWR, SENSOR

Standard

100BASE-TX/10BASE-T

Connector

M12 4pin connector

Japanese / English / Deutsch / Chinese (Simplified) /
Chinese (Traditional) / Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese /
Korean

Languages

USB memory*2

Expanded memory

Rating

Specifications

Environmental
resistance

*1
*2
*3

8-4

Power voltage

DC 24V 10% (including ripple)

Consumption
current

0.2A or lower

Ambient
temperature

0 to +50C (No freezing)

Relative humidity*3

35 to 80%RH (No condensation)

Vibration

10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y,

and Z axes

Drop impact
resistance

1.3m over the concrete (2 times each in the arbitrary direction)

Enclosure rating

IP40

Material

Polycarbonate

Weight

Approx. 180g

This is dedicated for connection with IV Series sensor.

Use the KEYENCE recommended product.
If the ambient temperature is over 40C, use it in the absolute humidity of 40C 80% RH or lower.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Specifications

MEMO

8
Specifications

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

8-5

Dimensions

Dimensions
Sensor
yyIV-500C
yyIV-500CA

yyIV-150M
yyIV-150MA

yyIV-500M
yyIV-500MA

yyIV-2000M
yyIV-2000MA
(102)

R5

52

50
Focusing position
adjustment screw
(MF type only)

50

0.4

41
10.5

50

10.5

32.4

57.4

Specifications

10.5

81.5

Mounting
adapter

56
58

20

1/4-20UNC
(Depth 6mm)

WD reference surface

8-6

45.5

25

4-M4

(Depth 6mm)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

3-M3
(Depth 6mm)
20.5

(108)

Dimensions

34.6

134

yyWith dome attachment

Installed distance : 0 to 50 mm from the front of the dome attachment
Compatible sensor : Standard range type/Short range type

62
Distance from WD reference surface

yyWith polarizing filter attachment

32

Specifications

56

5
Distance from WD reference surface

Optional parts for the sensor

Dome attachment
yyIV-D10

134

90.4

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

8-7

Dimensions

Polarizing filter attachment

Power I/O cable

yyOP-87436

yyOP-87440
(2m)

yyOP-87437
32

yyOP-87441
(5m)

yyOP-87442
(10m)

2000
5000
10000

6.7

15

56

45

Mounting adapter
yyOP-87460

8
Specifications

4-3.2
6.8 Counterbore depth 3mm

1/4-20UNC
(Depth 6mm)

20

56

57

4-M4
(Depth 6mm)
17

25

Front cover
yyOP-87461
0.4

50

27.1

8-8

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

120

5
150 5
180

Dimensions

Bracket
yyOP-87685
112.5

56

19.6

31.6

93

48.4

50

0.4

99

58

Specifications

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

82.5

41

(99)

8-9

Dimensions

Intelligent Monitor
yyIV-M30

102.3
70.56
(Display area)

(2.2)
(13)

1.4

52.12
(Display area)

84

(52)

USB port
26.4
(Excluding the
convexed surface)

R20

(109)

Specifications

R50

yyUsing the wall mounting adapter

6
8
2.74
98.7

40

20.2
2-3.5
30.3

Mounting hole dimension

40

8-10

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

2-M3

Dimensions

yyUsing the panel mounting adapter

119
110

4 22.8

110

92 +1
0

110.5

109 100 91.5

4-3.5

100
111 +1
0

Panel thickness
1 to 4mm

(40)

Panel cutting dimensions

4-M3
Screw depth 4.2

(97)

yyUsing the DIN mounting adapter

Specifications

107

35.9

57.1

33.8

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

8-11

Dimensions

Optional parts for the monitor

Monitor power cable
yyOP-87444
(5m)

yyOP-87445
(10m)

yyOP-87464
4.5

9.5

3.7

yyOP-87443
(2m)

Wall mounting adapter

26.7

96.9

2000
5000
10000

Protection sheet

48

yyOP-87463

8.5

Panel mounting adapter

73.9
69.9

yyOP-87465

8
Specifications

50.4
109

t = 0.16

Stylus

119

yyOP-87462
7.6

94.7

5.6

DIN mounting adapter

yyOP-87466

81.3

9.9
107

8-12

30.7

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

18.5

Dimensions

Connection Cable
Monitor cable

Ethernet cable
yyOP-87451 (5m)
yyOP-87453 (20m)

yyOP-87458
(5m)

yyOP-87459
(10m)

2000
5000
10000
20000

14.6

14.8

6.4

14.8

47.3

yyOP-87457
(2m)

6.4

yyOP-87450 (2m)
yyOP-87452 (10m)

47.3

2000
5000
10000

59

47.3

8
Specifications

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

8-13

Dimensions

MEMO

8
Specifications
8-14

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Appendices

Status Table.......................................................A-2
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and
Position Adjustment Tool................................. A-5
Settings List.......................................................A-6
Troubleshooting..............................................A-19
Error Messages...............................................A-22
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be
Connected with the Sensor............................ A-28
Initializing the Network Settings 
(IP Reset Switch).............................................A-40
Maintenance.....................................................A-41
Index.................................................................A-42

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-1

Status Table

Status Table
Status table
Monitor
screen
type

Status

Sensor operation indicator light

PWR/ERR

Waiting for a trigger

Running *2

Judgment processing

RUN

Switching programs

Lighting
(green)

TEST

Trigger Options, Master Registration, etc.

Focus adjustment (MF)
Setting

Automatically adjusting the brightness

Automatically adjusting the focus (AF)

LIVE

Trigger error
Error

*5
OFF

Blink
(green)

OFF

*5

OFF

*14

OFF

Blink
(green)

OFF

*15
OFF

Others

OFF

*13

Setup Adjustment
I/O Monitor

*3

TRIG

*9

Registering the external master image

Limit Adjustment

OUT

Running

RUN

Setting

LIVE

Blink (red)

Lighting
(red)

Same as normal

External master registration error

System error
Startup memory readout error

OFF

OFF

/ indicates enable/disable of the input.

ON/OFF indicates the following status. The operation differs according to the output setting (N.O./N.C).
yyFor N.O. ON : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.

OFF : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
yyFor N.C. ON : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.

OFF : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
*1 Turns ON if the judgment is OK. Turns OFF if it is NG.

When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.

When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.

The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].

Total Status Conditions (Page 4-65)

When the position adjustment is NG, the status of each tool becomes NG.
*2 The sensor continues running even during the operation of the [Monitor Settings/Sensor Image
History/USB Memory] screen in the run screen.
*3 Indicates the overall status result of the previous judgment process.
OK: Lighting (green), NG: Lighting (red)
*4 Outputs the status result of the previous judgment process.
*5 Lights (one-shot) by linking to the trigger issuance (external/internal).

When a trigger delay has been set, it lights before the delay.
A-2

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Status Table

Input
External
trigger

*6

Output

External
Switch
master image
programs
registration

*7

*8

*10

*11

*11

*10

Clear
Error

Total Status / Total status NG /

Each tool / Each logic /
Pos.Adj. *1

OFF

BUSY

Error

ON

OFF

*4

ON

*12

Same
as while
running

OFF

OFF
OFF

*13

RUN

OFF
*16

OFF

OFF

OFF

Same as normal

Same as normal

OFF

OFF

*17

*17

ON
OFF

*17

*6 Disregards the input. A trigger error occurs.

*7 Stops the judgment process and switches over.
*8 Stops the judgment process and registers the previously taken image as a master image.
*9 Turns off the light before the process is completed. Until the light turns off, the previous status result
will be displayed.
*10 After the current process is completed, generates the new input.
*11 Do not use. The processing order becomes indeterminate.
*12 Turns OFF before the process is completed. Outputs the previous status result until this turns OFF.
*13 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image will be updated. The Busy output operates.
*14 The flashing cycle of the orange light changes by linking to the focus indicator. The STATUS indicator
light operates in the same way.
*15 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image is updated.
*16 While the I/O monitor function is used, only the operation of the I/O lines is confirmed. The assigned
functions will not operate.
*17 The NPN open collector output turns OFF regardless of the output settings (N.O./N.C.) and the
polarity (NPN/PNP) settings.
Additionally, refer to

Chapter 7 Controlling with Input/Output Line (Page 7-1).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-3

Status Table

Displaying and outputting the status result

Status

Display

Total Status
NG

Total Status *2

Judgment of each tool

Output

Display

Output

Output

---

OFF

--

OFF

OFF

OK

0 to 100

ON

Judge is NG

NG

0 to 100

OFF

Unable to judge *6

--

---

OFF

Judgment

Matching rate *1

Waiting for a trigger

(Not judged) *3

--

Judge is OK

*4

*5

*6

OFF

ON

*1 When the setting scale is changed by the Color Area/Area tool, 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected.
The cut-off process (Page A-5) may be performed for the outline tool and the position adjustment tool.
*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
Total Status Conditions (Page 4-65)

*3 In this status, there is no trigger input after the power turned ON, after the program number has
changed, or after a shift from the setting mode to the run mode.
*4 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
*5 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
*6 The judgment of position adjustment tool cannot be determined if the judgment of each tool cannot be
determined at the time of using the position adjustment tool. For details, refer to
Displaying and
outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment (Page A-4).

Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment
Position
Window
adjustment
protrusion *1
result
No
Succeeded
Yes

Failed

Display/output

Judgment of each tool

Total Total Status

Color Area/ Status *2
NG
Area

Pos. Adj.

Outline

View judgment

OK

OK/NG

OK/NG

Status output

ON

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

View matching rate

0 to 100

0 to 100

View judgment

OK

OK/NG

-- *6

Status output

ON

ON/OFF

OFF

0 to 100

*7

0 to 100

---

*3

*4

*5

*3

*4

*6

View matching rate

0 to 100

View judgment

NG

--

--

NG

Status output

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

View matching rate

0 to 100

---

---

ON

*1 This is an operation for if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the imaging area
(Page 4-17) at the time of position adjustment succeeded.
*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
Total Status Conditions (Page 4-65)

*3 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
*4 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
*5 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected when the setting scale has been changed.
*6 For details of the targets outline which is protruded from the search region, refer to
Matching rate
at the time of protrusion (Page A-5)
*7 The judgment cannot be determined if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the
imaging area.
A-4

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool

Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and

Position Adjustment Tool
Matching rate at the time of protrusion
When the search region is Entire
zz
When the target outline protrudes from the
imaging area, the protruding outline is excluded
from the target for calculating the matching rate.
The matching rate decreases in proportion to
the protrusion amount.
Tool window
Protruding outline
(excluded from the target for
calculating the matching rate)

Cut-off process of the matching rate

The cut-off process means the process where the
outline detection process is ended when no outline
exceeding a certain matching rate (cut-off value)
below the threshold value is found.
A matching rate which has been cut off becomes
0. Because the cut-off value is linked to the
threshold, the cut-off value is also changed when
the threshold is changed.
(Cut-off value)
Threshold
Matching
rate

Outline to be targeted
for calculating the
matching rate

Cut-off processing range

(Range where the matching rate
becomes 0)

Current
matching rate

Imaging area

When the search region is Partial

zz

The sensor searches the outline of the target that

is in the search region. The matching rate of the
target being out of search region will be 0.
If the target is being protruded from the imaging
area, the matching rate will decrease depends
on how much the target is protruded from the
imaging area.

The above behavior is the case that the version

of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later.
For the version R1.00, the matching rate
decreases in proportion to the protrusion amount.

When the tool window after position adjustment

protrudes from the imaging area, the judgment
display of the Color Area/Area tool becomes -(Unable to judge) and the status output turns OFF.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-5

Settings List

Settings List
RUN screen (menu display OFF)
Menu

Description

Setting range

Reference
page

(Tool name)

A tool to be selected on the Number of tools set in the

monitor can be switched. program

5-4

Menu

Displays the menu.

5-4

Setting range

Reference
page

Number of tools set in the

program

5-4

RUN screen (menu display ON)

Menu

Description

(Tool name)

A tool to be selected
on the monitor can be
switched.

OFF

Hides menus.

5-4

Monitor Settings

The Monitor Settings

screen opens.

6-45

Sensor Image History

Displays the Sensor

Image History screen.

6-14

Displays the image

history in the sensor.

6-14

Batch Backup

Backs up the image

history in the sensor.

6-19

View

Displays the selected image

in full-screen in the monitor.

5-6

Save to USB Memory

Saves the displayed image

to the USB memory.

6-20

Auto Tuning

Performs the Tool Auto

Tuning based on the
displayed image.

View

5-20

Clear

Deletes the image history

in the sensor.

6-16

Logging Settings

Settings cannot be
changed during running.

6-17

Displays the USB

Memory screen.

6-18

USB Memory

A-6

yyAutoTune as OK
yyAutoTune as NG

Batch Backup

Backs up the sensor

settings and image
history into the USB
memory.

Transfer Program Settings

Transfers the settings

backed up into the USB
memory to the sensor.

Screen Capture Settings

Saves the image displayed

on the monitor into the
yyON (default value)
USB memory as an image yyOFF
data (bmp).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

yyProgram Only
yyProg.+Image Hist.
(default value)
-

6-19

6-21

6-23

Settings List

Menu

Description

Setting range

Reference
page

Sensor Setup

Displays the Sensor

Setup Menu screen.

6-7

Trig

Displays when the

external trigger is set.

4-7

Zoom

Sets the monitor to fullscreen mode. Zooming

in/out can be performed.

yy1.0x (default value)

yy1.5x
yy2.0x
yy3.0x

5-6

Tool View

Changes the display

method of the tool.

yyOFF
yyWindow
yyProcess 1 (default
value)
yyProcess 2

5-7

Analysis

Displays the analysis

information (statistics/
histogram).

yyOFF (default value)

yyStatistics
yyHistogram

5-10
5-12

View

Sensor Setup Menu screen

Menu

Description

Setting range

Reference
page

Program

Switches the programs to

PROG_00 to PROG_31
be set.

6-8

Detail

Displays the sensor

program detail screen

6-12
6-13

(Master image)

Displays the master

image of the currently
selected program.

(Program information)

Displays an information
of selected program.

PROG_00 to PROG_31
Up to 16 characters
(English and Japanese
single byte characters)

6-7
6-12
6-13

Edit

Edits a program name.

Copy

Copies the selected

program to unregistered
program.

6-12

Initialize

Initializes the program

settings.

6-13

Sensor Setup

Displays the Settings

Navigator screen.

4-1

Limit Adjustment

Adjusts the threshold of

selected tool.

Tool Auto Tuning

Displays the screen for

the Tool Auto Tuning.

5-15

Sensor Advanced

Displays the sensor

advanced screen.

6-25

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

0 to 100

6-12

5-14

A-7

Settings List

Setting range

Reference
page

Displays the Sensor

Image History screen.

6-14

Displays the image

history in the sensor.

6-14

Batch Backup

Backs up the image

history in the sensor.

6-19

View

Displays the selected image

in full-screen in the monitor.

5-6

Save to USB Memory

Saves the displayed image

to the USB memory.

6-20

Auto Tuning

Performs the Tool Auto

Tuning based on the
displayed image.

Menu

Description

Sensor Image History

View

Deletes the image history

in the sensor.

Image History Settings

Sets the condition of an image yyAll

to log as an image history.
yyNG only (default value)

6-17

Displays the USB

Memory screen.

6-18

6-16

Batch Backup

Backs up the sensor

yyProgram Only
settings and image history yyProg.+Image Hist.
(default value)
into the USB memory.

6-19

Transfer Program Settings

Transfers the settings

backed up into the USB
memory to the sensor.

6-21

Option (Transfer All Settings)

Screen Capture Settings

RUN

A-8

5-20

Clear

USB Memory

yyAutoTune as OK
yyAutoTune as NG

Transfers the I/O polarity,

yyEnable
network settings and device (disabled after the transfer)
name simultaneously with
yyDisabled
the settings data transfer.
(default value)

6-21

Saves the image

displayed on the monitor
into the USB memory as
an image data (bmp).

6-23

Displays the run screen

(menu display OFF).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

yyON (default value)

yyOFF
-

5-2

Settings List

Monitor Settings screen

Menu
Sensor Connect

Description

Setting range

Reference
page

Selects a connection
method of the sensor and
monitor.

6-46

Direct/Network

Switches the connection

yyDirect Connection
method of the sensor and
yyNetwork Connection
monitor.

6-46

Search Sensor

Searches for sensors on

the network and perform
their connection.

6-46

Specify Sensor

Specifies the IP address

of the sensor to connect.

6-46

Monitor Device Settings

Network
Settings

Display
Settings

Touch
Screen
Lock

6-45

MAC Address

Displays the MAC

address for the monitor.

IP Address

Displays the IP address

of the monitor.

192.168.10.1
(default value)

6-48

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask 255.255.255.0

of the monitor.
(default value)

6-48

Default Gateway

Displays the default

gateway of the monitor.

0.0.0.0
(default value)

6-48

Manual Trigger

Sets the Manual Trigger

to enable/disable.

yyEnable (default value)

yyDisable

6-49

Update Image in RUN

Mode

Sets whether or not

to update an image
displayed on the monitor
during running.

yyON (default value)

yyOFF

6-49

Tool Auto Tuning Guide

Sets the Tool Auto Tuning yyShow (default value)

Guide to Show/Hide.
yyHide

6-49

Touch Screen Lock

Sets Touch Screen Lock

yyEnable
function to enable/disable. yyDisable (default value)

6-50

Password

Sets a password when

the Touch Screen Lock
function is enabled.

6-50

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Up to 8 characters
(English and Japanese
single byte characters)

6-48

A-9

Settings List

Menu

Description

Setting range

Monitor Environment

6-45

Language

Selects the language

to be displayed on the
monitor.

Time

Sets date and time.

yyEnglish
yyJapanese
yyDeutsch
yyChinese (Simplified)
yyChinese (Traditional)
yyItalian
yyFrench
yySpanish
yyPortuguese
yyKorean
-

Backlight Brightness

Adjusts the brightness of

backlight on the monitor.

Auto Off

Sets the Auto off function

yyEnable
of backlight on the monitor
yyDisable (default value)
to Enable/Disable.

Auto Off Time Delay

Sets a time until the

back light turns off when
the Auto off function is
enabled.

Backlight

Touch Panel Calibration

Reference
page

Adjusts the position to be

tapped of the monitor.

1 to 7 (default value: 5)

yy30 sec
yy1 min (default value)
yy5 min
yy10 min
yy30 min
-

System

6-51

6-51
6-52
6-52

6-52

6-52
6-45

Displays the model,

version, serial number,
MAC address, and IP
address of the monitor.

6-53

Displays a sensor
information.

6-43

Initialize Monitor

Initializes the settings of

the monitor.

6-53

Update Monitor

Updates the operation software

version of the monitor.

6-53

Monitor Information
Sensor Information

A-10

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Settings List

Sensor Advanced screen

Menu

Description

Setting range

Environmental

6-25
IN1

Sets a detection timing of

yyExt. Trigger
the trigger input for IN1
yyExt. Trigger
input line.

IN2 to IN6

Sets a function to the

input line IN2 to IN6.

Option

Sets whether or not to

write data into ROM
yyYes
when the external master
yyNo (default value)
image registration is
performed.

6-26

OUT1 to
OUT4

Sets the output line

settings (OUT1 to 4).

yyN.O.
yyN.C.

6-27

Common
Output
Settings

Selects an output mode.

yyLatching (default value)

yyOne-Shot

6-27

Polarity

Selects the polarity (I/O

format) of the sensor.

yyNPN
yyPNP

6-28

I/O Monitor

Checks whether an input

yyON
line for control is correctly
yyOFF
wired or not.

6-28

Device Name

Up to 16 characters
Sets a name of the sensor. (English and Japanese
single byte characters)

6-29

Password
Lock

Sets the Password

Lock function to enable/
disable.

6-30

Password

Sets a password when the Up to 8 characters

Password Lock function of (English and Japanese
the sensor is enabled.
single byte characters)

6-30

MAC Address

Displays the MAC

address for the sensor.

6-31

IP Address

Displays the IP address

of the sensor.

6-31

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask

of the sensor.

6-31

Default Gateway

Displays the default

gateway of the sensor.

6-31

Input
Settings

I/O Settings
Output
Settings

Device
Name/
Pass

Network
Settings

Reference
page

Security

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

yyOFF
yyProgram bit0 to bit4
yyClear Error
yyExt. Master Save

yyON
yyOFF (default value)

6-26

6-26

A-11

Settings List

Menu

Description

Setting range

Adv. Network Settings

6-32
Transfers the image
data and status result
yyOFF
information of the sensor yyON
memory to an FTP server.

FTP Client

Displays the IP address

of the FTP server.

User Name

Input the user name for

Up to 16 characters can
logging in to the FTP server. be set.

6-33

Input the password for

Up to 16 characters can
logging in to the FTP server. be set.

6-33

Enables/disables the
passive mode.

6-33

yyEnable
yyDisable

Connection Tests the connection with

Test
the FTP server.

Transfer
Condition

6-34

Selects the transfer

condition of image data.

yyAll
yyNG Only

6-34

File Format

Selects the file saving

format for image data.

yyIVP
yyBMP

6-35

Transfer
Judgment
Results

Transfers judgement
results simultaneously
with the image data.

yyEnable
yyDisable

6-35

FTP Error

Turns ON the Error

output function for when
a file transfer failed.

yyEnable
yyDisable

6-35

Folder

Displays the transfer

destination folder.

Up to 16 characters can
be set.

6-35

File Name

Sets the file name of

the image data to be
transferred.

Up to 16 characters can
be set.

6-36

0-65535

6-36

Creates subfolders under

yyEnable
the transfer destination
yyDisable
folder.

6-36

Protocol

yyDisable
Selects the communication
yyEtherNet/IP
protocol for the sensor.
yyPROFINET

6-37

Handshake Control

Enables/disables the
yyEnable
handshake control of data. yyDisable

6-37

Create
Subfolder

A-12

6-33

Transfer
Condition

Transfer
Destination
Input the upper limit
Folder
Index
of the numbers to be
Settings
Upper Limit
appended to file names.

Field
Network

6-32

IP Address

FTP
Destination Password
Settings
Passive
Mode

FTP

Reference
page

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Settings List

Menu

Description

Setting range

Setup Adjustment
Tilt Correction

Image Settings
Rotate 180
Image Settings
White Balance
(Color type only)
Image Settings

Reference
page
6-25

Shapes can be adjusted

to the correct shape if an
image displayed on the
monitor is distorted.

yyOFF (default value)

yyVertical
yyHorizontal

6-38

Adjusts imaging for the

Tilt Correction.

Same as Image
Optimization

6-38

Displays the image

displayed on the monitor
by rotating 180.

yyON
yyOFF (default value)

6-40

Adjusts imaging for the

Rotate 180.

Same as Image
Optimization

6-40

Adjusts a white balance

for the built-in camera of
the sensor.
Adjusts imaging for the
White balance.

Same as Image
Optimization

Program

6-41
6-41
6-25

Program Switch Method

Select a changing
method for programs.

yyMonitor/PC (default value)

yyExternal IN

6-42

Auto Focus Adj Pos

Sets whether or not

to share the adjusting
position for auto focus to
all programs.

yyCommon
yyIndividual (default value)

6-42

System

6-25

Sensor Information

Displays the model,

version, serial number,
MAC address, IP address,
and device name of the
sensor.

6-43

Initialize Sensor

Initializes the sensor

settings.

6-44

Update Sensor

Updates the operation

software of the sensor.

6-44

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-13

Settings List

Sensor Setup screen

1. Image Optimization
Menu

Description

Setting range

Reference
page

Trigger Options

Internal
Trigger interval:
1 to 10000 ms
(default value: 50 ms)
Sets an imaging timing of
a target.
External
Trigger delay:
0 to 1000 ms
(default value: 0 ms)

4-8

Auto Brightness Adjustment

Automatically adjusts a
image brightness.

4-11

Adjusts focus of the

sensor.

Manual focusing type

Auto focusing type
yyAutomatic
yyManual

4-12

Sets an imaging area.

yyEntire (default value)

yyPartial

4-17

Bright

Adjusts brightness of an
image manually.

Standard range type

(color)
1 to 100 (default value: 20)
Standard range type
(monochrome)
1 to 120 (default value: 20)
Short range type
1 to 120 (default value: 20)
Long rang type
1 to 100 (default value: 20)

4-18

Imaging
Mode

Select an imaging mode

of the sensor.

yyNormal (default value)

yyHDR
yyHighGain

4-18

Focus Adjustment

Imaging Area

Advanced
Brightness
Adjustment
Extended
functions
menu

A-14

Lighting

yyOFF
Select a lighting mode for
yyFlash (default value)
the built-in light.
yyContinuous

4-18

Color Filters
(color type only)

Applies the color filters if

an outline of a certain color
OFF (default value),
cannot be displayed when
Red, Green, Blue, Cyan,
an image is displayed in
Magenta, Yellow
monochrome display with
the color type sensor.

4-19

Digital Zoom
(monochrome type only)

Switches the digital zoom yyON

to ON/OFF.
yyOFF (default value)

4-19

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Settings List

2. Master Registration
Setting range

Reference
page

Registers the image

imaged by sensor as a
master image.

4-21

Select Img From Image

History

Registers the image of

the image history in the
memory of the sensor as
a master image.

4-22

Select Img From USB

Memory

Registers the image in USB

memory as a master image.

4-24

Brightness Correction

Sets a reference of
brightness to the master
image.

4-26

Setting range

Reference
page

4-31

Menu

Description

Register Live Image as Master

Extended
functions
menu

3. Tool Settings
Menu

Description

Add Tool

Newly sets a tool.

Edit
Window

Fine Tune
Outline
Outline

Window
Shape

Select a window shape

to specify an area of the
target to be detected.

yy Rect (default value)

yy Circle

4-33

Search
Region

Specifies an area to
search an outline of the
target.

yyEntire (Without position

adjustment)
yyPartial (With position
adjustment)

4-35

Remove
Outline

Disables an unnecessary
outline which interrupts
yyUndo
the stabilized detection,
yyClear
and then judges.

4-35

Selects the eraser width of yyNarrow (default value)

the pen when specifying
yyMiddle
an unnecessary outline.
yyWide

4-35

Select an extraction
sensitivity of an outline.

yyHigh
yyNormal (default value)
yyLow

4-36

Adjusts a threshold used

in anomaly detection.

0 to 100
(default value: 70)

4-33

Sets an angle limit for

detecting outlines to the
rotating direction.

0 to 180
(default value: 20)

4-38

Select whether or not to

allow the margin for the
limited angle.

yyON (default value)

yyOFF

4-38

Select a detection mode

for outline search.

yyHigh Accuracy
yyHigh Speed (default value)

4-38

Eraser
Width
Sensitivity

Limit Adjustment
Rotation
Range
Margin
Extended
functions
menu
Search
Algorithm
Tool Name

Up to 8 characters
Sets an arbitrary name to
(English and Japanese
the tool.
single byte characters)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-39
A-15

Settings List

Menu

Description

Setting range

Reference
page

Window
Shape

Select a window shape

to specify the area of a
target to be extracted.

yy Rect (default value)

yy Circle
yyEntire

4-42

Mask

Adds a rectangular/
circular mask region in
the tool window frame.
Adds a rectangular/
circular cutting region in
the mask region.

yyAdd Mask
yyCut Mask

4-45

Tap a color to be
extracted on the master
image and sets an
extraction range.

yyExtract Area [+]

yyExtract Area [-]
yyUndo
yyClear

4-42

Edit
Window

Color Extraction
(For color type)

A color range to be
extracted can be set on
to Live Image
the Live image of the
target.
Brightness Extraction
(For monochrome type)

Color
Area/
Area

yyExtraction Range
(0 to 255)
yyUndo
yyClear

4-42

4-42

A brightness range to
be extracted can be set
on the Live image of the
target.

4-42

Adjusts a threshold used

in anomaly detection.

0 to 100 (default value: 50)

4-42

Upper Limit

Sets the upper limit of a

threshold.

yyEnable
yyDisable (default value)

4-46

Scale

When an upper limit

is Enable, select a
threshold scale matching
the coincidence range
required for judgment.

yy0-200 (default value)

yy0-999

4-46

Advanced
Color
Extraction
(Color type)

Specifies a color to be
extracted as HSB
(H: Hue, S: Saturation,
B: Brightness).

yyH : 0 to 359
yyS : 0 to 255
yyB : 0 to 255

4-49

Advanced
Brightness
Extended Extraction
functions (Monochrome
type)
menu

Specifies a brightness
value to be extracted.

0 to 255

4-49

to Live Image
Limit Adjustment

Upper
Limit

A-16

Tap brightness to be
extracted on the master
image and sets an
extraction range.

Tool Name

Up to 8 characters
Sets an arbitrary name to
(English and Japanese
the tool.
single byte characters)

4-49

Fixed
Reference
Area

Select a condition which yyDisable

the matching rate of the
yyEnable: Large
Color Area/Area is 100%. yyEnable: Small

4-50

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Settings List

Menu

Edit
Window

Pos.
Adj.

Fine Tune
Outline

Description

Setting range

Reference
page

Window
Shape

Select a window shape

to specify an area of the
target to be detected.

yy Rect (default value)

yy Circle

4-53

Search
Region

Specifies an area to
search an outline of the
target.

yyEntire
yyPartial

4-55

Remove
Outline

Disables an unnecessary
outline which interrupts
yyUndo
the stabilized detection,
yyClear
and then judges.

4-55

Selects the eraser width of yyNarrow (default value)

the pen when specifying
yyMiddle
an unnecessary outline.
yyWide

4-55

Select an extraction
sensitivity of an outline.

yyHigh
yyNormal (default value)
yyLow

4-55

Adjusts a threshold used

in anomaly detection.

0 to 100 (default value: 70)

4-53

Sets an angle limit for

adjusting position to the
rotating direction.

0 to 180
(default value: 20)

4-57

Select whether or not to

allow the margin for the
limited angle.

yyON (default value)

yyOFF

4-57

Eraser
Width
Sensitivity

Limit Adjustment
Rotation
Extended Range
functions
menu
Margin
Edit Tool

Edits the settings of the

tool which has already
been set.

4-31

Delete Tool

Deletes an unnecessary
tool.

4-31

Extended
functions
menu

Copies the tool which has

been set and pastes it to
the same position.
This is for the Outline tool
and the Color Area/Area
tool.

4-58

Copy Tool

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-17

Settings List

4. Output Assignment
Menu

Description

Setting range

Reference
page

4-60

OUT1 to OUT4

Sets the output items

to be assigned to the
output line.

yyTotal Status
yyTot. StatusNG
yyRUN
yyBUSY
yyError
yyPos. Adj.
yyJudge result of each
tool (Tool 1 to Tool 16)
yyLogical operation result
of each tool
(Logic 1 to Logic 4)
yyOFF (not used)

Trigger Error

Selects whether to
ON/OFF the output
when the trigger error
occurred.

yyON
yyOFF (default value)

4-60

Logic

Selects the logical

operation method of
logics.

yyAND
yyOR

4-63

(Tool selection)

Select tools to be
assigned to the logic.

yyUnused
yyUsed
yyUsed (Inverse)

4-63

Selects a condition for

the total status result.

yyAll Tools OK
yyAny Tools OK
yyLogic 1 to 4

4-65

Extended
functions
menu

Logic Settings
(Logic 1 to 4)

Total Status Conditions

A-18

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Symptom

Check point

The PWR/ERR indicator light An error occurred. Check the

of the sensor or the PWR
errors from lighting or blinking
indicator light of the monitor
in red.
is lighting or blinking in red.
An error message is
displayed on the monitor.
The power is not supplied to
the sensor or monitor does
not turn on.

Reference
page

Refer to "Error Message".

A-22

Check the details of the error

message.

Refer to "Error Message".

Is the power cable correctly

connected?

Connect the power cable

correctly.

2-12

Is the voltage or capacity of

the power source meet the
specification?

Use a power source of the

correct rating.

8-2

Is the installed distance of the

target correct?

Place a target at the correct

installed distance. The
installed distance depends on
the sensor type.

2-2

Is the sensor view correct?

Place the sensor in such a way

that the sensor view matches
the target size.

2-2

Is the focus adjustment correct?

Adjust the focusing position

(focus) of the sensor.

4-12

Adjust the brightness of the

sensor.

4-11

Is the brightness adjustment

An image is not displayed on correct?
the monitor, or the image is
Is the target or the sensor
abnormal.
vibrating?
Does the ambient light affect
the image?

Devise anti-vibration measures

etc.
Use brightness correction.
Place the douser to prevent
the incident of ambient light.

A-22

4-26
-

Clean the front cover. Replace

it with the spare front cover
(OP-87461).

A-41

Is the function of Update Image Set the function of Update

in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? Image in the RUN mode to [ON].

6-49

Is the front cover dirty or

damaged?

The image or the status

result is not updated.

Remedy

Is the system in the setting

mode?

yyStart the run mode

yyTurn on the power of the
sensor again.

5-2

Is the trigger correctly input?

If a target is to be imaged
using an external trigger, input
the external trigger. When the
NPN is selected in the Polarity,
the circuit becomes a nonvoltage input circuit. When
PNP is selected in the Polarity,
the circuit becomes a voltage
input circuit. Check the cables.

2-12

All or part of the settings

necessary for running have not
been completed.

Complete the settings in

Settings Navigator.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

4-1

A-19

Troubleshooting

Symptom

Check point

Remedy

The status result is displayed Is the function of Update Image Set the function of Update
but the image is not.
in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? Image in the RUN mode to [ON].

Image update is slow.

(during operation/setting)

The monitor cannot be

operated using the touch
panel.

The network may be affected

by the traffic in the in-plant LAN.
Configure a local network and
Is the network connected to the confirm the network connection
in-plant LAN?
only for the IV Series.

The status result is not

output.

6-49

Is the input screen for the

unlock password displayed?

The touch screen lock of the

monitor or the password lock
of the sensor is enabled. Input
the unlock password.

6-30
6-50

The password is lost and cannot

unlock.

Contact your nearest

KEYENCE office.

Is the output line correctly

connected?

Correctly connect to the

external devices.

2-12

Is the output setting correctly

set?

Set the output line and output

settings correctly in the
Settings Navigator.

4-60

Is the system in the setting

mode?

Start the run mode

Is the threshold correctly set?

Set the threshold correctly.

5-14

Is the tool correctly set?

yySet the detection tool correctly.

yySet the position adjustment
tool correctly.

4-28

Is the Polarity correctly set?

Set the NPN or PNP according

to the circuits of the external
devices.

6-28

Set the N.O. (normally open)

Are the N.O. and N.C. correctly or N.C. (normally closed)
set?
according to the circuits of the
external devices.

A-20

6-49

Set the function of Update

Image in the RUN mode to OFF.

Are not there any damage or

crack on the touch screen?

Reference
page

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

5-2

6-27

Troubleshooting

Symptom

An external trigger cannot

be input.

Check point

Image data cannot be

transferred via FTP.

Reference
page

Is the trigger condition set to

[External]?

Select [External] in Trigger

Options.

4-8

Is the input line correctly

connected?

Correctly connect to the

external devices.

2-12

Has the input setting been

made correctly?

Make the input line and input

settings correctly in [Input
Settings].

6-26

Has the Polarity been correctly

set?

When the NPN is selected

in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a non-voltage input
circuit. When the PNP is
selected in the Polarity, the
circuit becomes a voltage input
circuit. Check the cables.

6-28

The program number cannot Has the switching method for

be changed with the input
the programs been correctly
line.
set?

The monitor and sensor

cannot be connected to.

Remedy

Set the switching method for

the programs to [External IN].

6-42

Has the input line been

correctly connected?

Correctly connect to the

external devices.

2-12

Has the input setting been

correctly set?

Set the input line and input

settings correctly in [Input
Settings].

6-26

Has the Polarity been correctly

set?

When the NPN is selected

in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a non-voltage input
circuit. When the PNP is
selected in the Polarity, the
circuit becomes a voltage input
circuit. Check the cables.

6-28

Check the cables and settings.

Refer to Remedy when the

Monitor cannot be Connected
with the Sensor (Page A-28).

A-28

Check the cables and settings.

Refer to Remedy when data

transfer via FTP is unavailable

A-38

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-21

Error Messages

Error Messages
Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor
The causes of, and remedies for, an error can be checked by observing the indicator light of the sensor.
PWR/ERR
indicator light

PWR/ERR
indicator
status
ON
Green

Blink

A
ON

Red

Blink

A-22

Cause

Remedy

In operation.

Setting in progress.
Operation stopped.

A system error occurred.

yyTurn on the power of this device.

yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.

A startup memory read error

occurred.
yyA data abnormality occurred
due to noise or because the
power switched OFF while
writing was in progress.

yyInitialize the settings.

yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.

A trigger error occurred.

A judgment process is not
performed.
yyIf a target is to be imaged
using an external trigger, the
external trigger will be input
during a BUSY status.
yyIf a target is to be imaged
using an internal trigger, the
trigger interval will become
shorter than the processing
time.

yyThe trigger error can be fixed using one of the

following procedure.
yyNext normal trigger input
yyClear Error input
yySwitching the program number
yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
yyDo not input an external trigger during a BUSY status.
yySet the trigger interval of the internal trigger to a value
that is longer than the processing time.
yyAn error will not occur if the trigger is set to [OFF]
described in output assignment for the Settings
Navigator (Page 4-60).

An external master image

registration error (without
registered master image)
occurred. The master image
is not updated.
yyThe image to be registered
as a master image was not
imaged.
yyThe work memory is
insufficient.

yyAn external master image registration error can be

fixed using one of the following procedures.
yySuccessful next external master image registration
yyClearing the Error input
yySwitching the program number
yyProceeding to the settings screen for sensor
yyTaking an image to be registered as a master image
and register it as an external master image.
yyDeleting one or more detection tools.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Error Messages

PWR/ERR
indicator
status

Red

Blink

OFF

Cause

Remedy

The external master image

registration error (with
yyAn external master image registration error can be
registered master image)
fixed using one of the following procedures.
occurred. The following
errors occurred even though
yySuccessful next external master image registration
the image was updated and
yyClearing the Error input
registered as a master image.
yySwitching the program number
yyFor the new master image,
yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
the outline cannot be
yyChecking that the image to be registered and the
extracted with the outline
tool.
detection tools/position adjustment settings are
yyFor the new master image,
applicable.
the area cannot be extracted
with the color area/area tool.
An FTP error occurred. The
following errors occurred.
yyConnection with the FTP
server failed.
yyTranfer to the transfer
destination folder failed.
yyThe transfer speed could
not catch up the sensor
processing speed.

An FTP error can be fixed using one of the following

procedures.
yyClick the [OK] button on the Error screen.
yyClear Error input.
yyResolve the causes of transfer failure.

yyPower is not supplied to this

device.
yyDuring focusing position
adjustment.
(Manual focus type only)

yyConnect the power cable correctly.

yyUse a power source of the correct rating.
yyComplete the focusing position adjustment.

Errors in a state that the PWR/ERR indicator light lights in red or blinks in red turn the error output ON.
Cables (Page 2-12)
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-60)

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-23

Error Messages

Confirming error messages of the monitor

Message
Sensor system error happens.
Turn on sensor.
If not turned on, contact local
service center.

Cause
A system error occurred
in the sensor.
yyIt is conceivable that a
fault occurred inside the
sensor.

Sensor internal memory reading

has failed.

Remedy
yyTurn on the power of the sensor
again.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.

A memory read error

occurred when the
sensor started.
Turn on or initialize sensor.
yyA data trouble occurred.
yyIt is conceivable that
After this message is closed,
[Initialize] button will be displayed. the power was switched
OFF during writing, or
noise was picked up.

yyInitialize the settings following

the instructions on the screen.
yyTurn on the power of the sensor
again.
yyDo not turn OFF the power
while saving the settings.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.

Sensor program xx is damaged.

Initialization is necessary.

yyInitialize the settings following

the instructions on the screen.
yyTurn on the power of the sensor
again.
yyDo not turn OFF the power
while saving the settings.
yyIf the same error occurs,
contact your nearest KEYENCE
office.

A memory read error

occurred when the
sensor started.
After this message is closed,
yyA data trouble occurred
[Initialize] button will be displayed. during the execution of
program number xx.
yyIt is conceivable that
the power was switched
OFF during writing, or
noise was picked up.
Trigger error

A-24

A trigger error occurred.

yyAn trigger error can be fixed
Judgment processing has using one of the following
not been executed.
procedure.
yyIf a target is to be
yyNext normal trigger input
imaged using an
yyClearing the Error input
external trigger, the
yySwitching the program
external trigger will be
number
input during a BUSY
yyProceeding to the settings
status.
screen of the sensor
yyIf a target is to be
yyDo not input the external trigger
imaged using an
during a BUSY status.
internal trigger, the
yySet the trigger interval of the
trigger interval will
internal trigger to a value that
become shorter than
is longer than the processing
time.
the processing time.
yyAn error will not occur if the
trigger is set to [OFF] described
in output assignment for the
Settings Navigator (Page
4-60).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Output/
Indicator

*1

*1

*1

*2

Error Messages

Message

Cause

Remedy

An external master image yyAn external master image

registration error can be fixed
registration error (with
using one of the following
registered master image)
procedures.
occurred. The following
errors occurred even
yySuccessful next external
master image registration
though the image was
updated and registered
yyClearing the Error input
Some tools can not correctly
as a master image.
yySwitching the program
judged because area is 0 as a
number
yyFor the new master
result of Ext. Master Save.
image, the outline
yyProceeding to the settings
(Matching rate is 0.)
cannot be extracted
screen of the sensor
Check tool configuration.
with the outline tool.
yyChecking that the image to be
registered and the detection
Brightness of brightness adjustment yyFor the new master
image, the area cannot
tools/position adjustment
area is not adjustable as a result of
be extracted with the
settings are applicable.
Ext. Master Save.
Color Area/Area tool.
yyAdjusting the brightness of the
Check configuration of brightness
image to be registered properly.
yyThe brightness
adjustment.
correction cannot be
performed correctly for
the new master image.

Output/
Indicator

Some tools can not correctly judge

because of insufficient outline
extraction amount as a result of
Ext. Master Save.
(Matching rate is 0.)
Check tool configuration.

Outer master registration fails

because image is not captured.

Outer master registration fails

because of lack of work memory.

An external master image yyAn external master image

registration error (with no
registration error can be fixed
registered master image)
using one of the following
occurred. The master
procedures.
image is not updated.
yySuccessful in next external
master image registration
yyThe image to be
registered as a master
yyClearing the Error input
image was not imaged.
yySwitching the program
number
yyThe work memory is
insufficient.
yyProceeding to the settings
screen of the sensor
yyTaking an image to be
registered as a mater image
and registering it as an external
master image.
yyDeleting one or more detection
tools.

Monitor fatal error (XXX) occurred. A system error occurred

yyTurn on the monitor power again.
Contact your nearest KEYENCE
in the monitor.
yyIf the same error occurs,
office.
contact your nearest KEYENCE
yyIt is conceivable that a
fault occurred inside the office.
Monitor system error happens.
monitor.

*2

*2

*3

Turn on monitor.
If not turned on, contact local
service center.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-25

Error Messages

Message

Cause

Remedy

Connecting to sensor

Connection is not possible Refer to Remedy when the

because there is no
Monitor cannot be Connected
response from the sensor. with the Sensor (Page A-28).

Connecting to sensor
(XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX)

Connection is not
possible because there
is no response from the
sensor with the specified
IP address.

Output/
Indicator

*4

Communication timeout to sensor Connection is not possible

because there is no
happens.
response from the sensor.
Data transfer to sensor fails.

Connection is not possible

because data transmission
to the sensor has failed.

Specified sensor is being

Connection is not possible
Disconnect the presently
connected to other PC or monitor. because the specified sensor connected monitor or PC and
is connected to a different
then re-connect it.
monitor or a different PC.
Only one monitor or PC can
be connected to a sensor at
the same time.
Writing in file fails.

File saving to the USB

memory failed.

Replace the USB memory.

Access to file or folder fails.

Access to the USB

memory failed.

yyFormat the USB memory.

yyReplace the USB memory.

Data saving has failed.

If it happens repeatedly:
yyReplace USB memory.
yyFormat USB memory.

The USB memory is

broken.

Disk space is insufficient.

Saving is not possible

because the amount of
free space of the USB
memory is insufficient.

A-26

Increase the amount of free

space by deleting files in the USB
memory or by formatting.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

*4

Error Messages

Message

Cause

Remedy

This file configuration data is for

xxxx.
This file is not readable.

The setting files for a

Read the setting files of a sensor
different model of sensors of the same model.
cannot be read.

FTP Connection Error

Connection with the FTP

server failed.

FTP Transfer Error

(Transfer Failed)

Data transfer to the

transfer destination folder
failed.

FTP Transfer Error

(Insufficient Data Buffer)

Data which is larger than

the remaining storage of
the FTP buffer has been
created and the transfer
failed.

Output/
Indicator

Remedy when data

Refer to
transfer via FTP is unavailable
(Page A-38).

*2

*1 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Lighting (red),
PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red)
*2 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Blinking (red),
PWR indicator light of the monitor: Blinking (red)
*3 PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red)
*4 SENSOR indicator light of the monitor: Off

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-27

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected

with the Sensor
Remedy when direct connection is unavailable
Status

Remedy

Retries occur repeatedly because

connection is not possible.
The status is as shown below.
yyConnection is not possible after power ON.
yyConnection is not possible using the [Connect]
button of the sensor connection setup screen.

yySupply power to the sensor.

yyConnect the sensor and the monitor correctly and directly
with a monitor cable.
Connecting directly (Page 2-16)
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of a
retry, the run screen opens automatically.
yyThe Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel]
button or [OK] button is tapped. Tap the [Connect] button
after a correct connection has been established.

If the problem is not solved using one of the above

remedies, reset (initialize) the sensor network settings.
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
(Page A-40)

A
yyThe error (381) "Data transfer to sensor
fails." may also be displayed.
yyConnection became impossible after
connection was established once.

yyConnect the sensor and the monitor correctly and directly

with a monitor cable.
Connecting directly (Page 2-16)
yyTap the [OK] button and close the message.
yyIn the case of a network connection, change the
configuration to network connection.
When connecting with the sensor via a network
(Page 6-46)
The network is connected to other network
devices such as multiple sensors or
computers.

A-28

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable

Status

Remedy
yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network
equipment.
Connecting via network (Page 2-16)
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of
retry, the run screen opens automatically.

Retries occur repeatedly because

connection is not possible after the power is
turned on.

The Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel]

button or [OK] button is tapped.

yyTap the [Connect] button after a correct connection has

established.

yyAn error (381) "Data transfer to sensor

fails." may also be displayed.
yyConnection became impossible after
connection was established once.

yyTap the [Search Sensor] button to search for the sensor.

Searching for and connecting to sensors on the
network (Page 6-47)
If a connection is unavailable, refer to
When the
connection cannot be established by searching for the
sensor (Page A-30).
yyTap the [Specify Sensor] button to connect the sensor.
Specifying the IP address of and connecting to the
sensor (Page 6-48)
If a connection is unavailable, refer to
When the
connection cannot be established by specifying the
sensor (Page A-31).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-29

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Status

Remedy
When the connection cannot be established by
searching for the sensor
yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network
equipment.
Connecting via network (Page 2-16)

The sensor was not found using the [Search

Sensor] button on the Sensor Connect
screen.

yyConfirm that the IP address of the monitor does not

coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also,
correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor
(Page A-36)
yyChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP
address of the sensor does not coincide with that of
the monitor or other devices. Also, reset (initialize) the
network setting for the sensor.
When directly connecting with the sensor (Page 6-46)
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor
(Page A-37)
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
(Page A-40)

yyThe following conditions are required for a successful

sensor search.
yyThe subnet masks of the sensor and monitor are matched.
yyThe sensor network setting is not set or the IP address
is not duplicated.

A-30

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Status

Remedy
When the connection cannot be established by
specifying the sensor
yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment.
Connecting via network (Page 2-16)
yySpecify the correct IP address of the sensor.

yyIf the sensor IP address has not been set, establish a

connection using the [Search Sensor] button.
Connection is not possible using the [Specify
Searching for and connecting to sensors on the network
Sensor] button or the [Connect] button on
(Page 6-47)
the Sensor Connect screen.
yyConfirm that the IP address of the monitor does not
coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also,
correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor
(Page A-36)
yyChange to direct connection and confirm that the IP
address of the sensor does not coincide with that of the
monitor or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet
mask and the default gateway.
Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor.
When directly connecting with the sensor (Page 6-46)
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor
(Page A-37)
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
(Page A-40)
yyTap the [Search Sensor] button to search for the sensor.
Searching for and connecting to sensors on the
network (Page 6-47)
When the
If a connection is unavailable, refer to
connection cannot be established by searching for the
sensor (Page A-30).

First connection after purchasing, or

connection after monitor initialization.

yyTap the [Specify Sensor] button to connect.

Specifying the IP address of and connecting to the sensor
(Page 6-48)
If a connection is unavailable, refer to
When the
connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor
(Page A-31).

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-31

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor

LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light
Displays the link status with the network.
LINK/ACT indicator
light

Status of the
LINK/ACT
indicator light

Remedy

ON

Correct link with the monitor

or the Ethernet switch.

Blink

Correct link with the monitor

or the Ethernet switch.
Data are being sent and
received.

Green

OFF

A-32

Status

Link is normal.
When connection with the monitor is not possible, check
the STATUS indicator light.

No correct link with the

monitor or the Ethernet
yySupply power to the sensor.
switch.
yySupply power to the monitor or the Ethernet switch of
yyPower is not supplied to this
the connection target.
unit or the connection target.
yyConnect the cable correctly.
yyThe cable is not connected
correctly.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

STATUS indicator light

Indicates the connection status within the monitor.
Confirm that the LINK/ACT indicator light is green (lighting) or green (blinking) and then check the STATUS
indicator light.
STATUS indicator
light

Status of
the STATUS
indicator light

ON

Green
Blink

OFF

Status

Remedy

Correct connection with the

monitor.
The connection with the
monitor has been established
by acquiring the IP address.

No correct connection with the

monitor.
The IP address of the sensor
has been acquired, but
connection with the monitor
has not been established.

For direct connection

Remedy when direct connection is unavailable
(Page A-28)
For network connection
Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable
(Page A-29)

For direct connection

Remedy when direct connection is unavailable
No correct connection with the
(Page
A-28)
monitor.
The IP address of the sensor For network connection
has not been acquired.
Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable
(Page A-29)

yyThe communication timeout time is 1 minute.

yyDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the monitor screen may fail to be updated while
the STATUS indicator light turned on, or the monitor may not accept an operation.
yyDuring the timeout interval, devices other than the previously connected monitor cannot be connected.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-33

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Confirming the status by observing the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor
The causes of an unavailable connection and countermeasures can be confirmed by checking the
SENSOR indicator light of the monitor.
SENSOR indicator light

Status of
the SENSOR
indicator light
ON

Green
Blink

OFF

Status

Remedy

Correct connection with the

sensor.
No correct connection with the
sensor.
The link with the sensor or
the Ethernet switch has been
established, but connection
with the sensor has not been
established.

For direct connection

Remedy when direct connection is unavailable
(Page A-28)
For network connection
Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable
(Page A-29)

No correct connection with the

yySupply power to the monitor.
sensor.
yySupply power to the sensor or the Ethernet switch of
The link with the sensor or the
the connection target.
Ethernet switch has not been
yyConnect the cable correctly.
established.

yyThe communication timeout interval is 1 minute.

yyDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the screen may fail to be updated while the
SENSOR indicator light in on, or the monitor may not accept an operation.

A-34

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Other methods of confirming

a network connection

3 Input the IP address of the sensor whose

existence is to be confirmed and tap the
[Ping Test] button.

Confirming the existence of the sensor

from the monitor
Whether or not the sensor is correctly connected can
be confirmed by performing a test communication
from the monitor to the sensor to be connected.

1 Displays the Sensor Connect screen.

The confirmation result will be displayed on the

monitor.

When the confirmation result is OK

zz
When the confirmation result is NG
zz

For the first startup of the monitor or after

zz
monitor initialization

Operation for initial startup of the monitor

(Network Connection) (Page 3-7)

If not connected with the sensor via a

zz
network

Automatically opens after the power is turned on.

If connected with the sensor via a network

zz
When connecting with the sensor via a
network (Page 6-46)
When the monitor and the sensor are connected
via a network, the [Network Connection] will be
displayed and the IP address of the connected
sensor will be displayed.

2 Tap the [Specify Sensor] button.

If the displayed confirmation result is

NG

Confirm the following contents.

yySupply power to the sensor and the network
equipment.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the
network equipment.
Connecting via network (Page 2-16)
y
Correctly
set the IP address, the subnet mask,
y
and the default gateway of the monitor and
sensor.
Searching for a sensor to be connected
(Page 3-8)
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the
monitor (Page A-36)
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the
sensor (Page A-37)
The existence confirmation function utilizes the ping
command. Note that even when this is executed
for devices other than a sensor, confirmation will
succeed if there is a response to the ping command.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-35

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Confirming/Setting the IP address of

the monitor

1 Open the Monitor Device Settings screen.

If not connected with the sensor via

zz
network

After the power turned on, the Sensor Connect

screen opens automatically. Tap the [Monitor
Device Settings] button.

If connected with the sensor via a network

zz
Monitor Settings (Page 6-45)

2 Tap the [Network Settings] button.

4 After confirmation/setting is completed,

tap the [OK] button.

yyIf the setting has not been changed, system

returns to the Monitor Settings screen.
yyIf the setting has been changed, the message
"Monitor will be restarted." appears.

5 Tap the [OK] button if the setting has been

changed.

The monitor restarts.

If the monitor could be connected with the

zz
sensor

The run screen opens.

If the monitor could not be connected with

zz
the sensor

The Sensor Connect screen opens. Set the

connection method etc. and connect the monitor
with the sensor.
Sensor Connect (Page 6-45)

The monitor network setting screen opens.

3 Confirm the IP address of the monitor.

For details of the connection method after initial

startup of the monitor or after monitor initialization
(Page 3-13), refer to
Operation for initial startup
of the monitor (Network Connection) (Page 3-7).

To change the settings, tap the [Edit] button

and display the editing screen. Set an arbitrary
address and tap the [OK] button.

A-36

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Confirming/Setting the IP address of

the sensor

5 Confirm the IP address of the sensor.

Directly connect the sensor and monitor, and

confirm the IP address of the sensor.
After returning to the network connection, set
the confirmed IP address of the sensor, and then
confirm whether or not to connect with the sensor.

1 Directly connect the monitor and the

sensor of the confirmation/setting target.

Connecting directly (Page 2-16)
When directly connecting with the sensor
(Page 6-46)

2 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

(Page 6-7)

3 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button.

yyTapping the [Edit] button displays the screen

to edit the address. Set the arbitrary address
and tap the [OK] button.
yyWhen the [Reset] button is tapped, the setup
values for the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and
[Default Gateway] will be reset and nothing will
be set. Again, set an arbitrary address.

6 After confirmation/setting is completed, tap

the [OK] button and exit from the network
settings.

7 Turn OFF the power and connect the

sensor and monitor via a network.

Connecting via network (Page 2-16)

8 Turn on the power.

If the monitor could be connected with the

zz
sensor

The run screen opens.

4 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then

the [Network Settings] button.

If the monitor could not be connected with

zz
the sensor

The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. Set the

connection method etc. and connect with the
sensor.
Remedy when connection via a network is
unavailable (Page A-29)

Confirming the router settings

When a router is used, confirm that the following
port is opened.
Sensor : 63000 (default value)
For the setting methods of the sensor port
number, refer to the following.
Network Settings (Page 6-31)
yyBOOTP is fixed as 67 or 68.
yyThe FTP port number can be changed on the
server. It is generally 20 or 21.
- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-37

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable

Status

Remedy

Connection with the FTP server failed.

yyConfirm the IP address of the FTP server and set it

correctly.
yyConfirm the port number of the FTP server and set it
correctly. Moreover, confirm the firewall software on the
PC whether the port is available or not.
yyConfirm the user name for logging in to the FTP server
and set it correctly.
yyConfirm the password for logging in to the FTP server
and set it correctly.

FTP Destination Settings (Page 6-33)

Data transfer to the transfer destination

folder failed.

yyAuthorization for accessing the transfer destination folder

is not granted. Acquire the access authorization of the
transfer destination folder and perform the operation
again.
yyConfirm that there is no file with the same name as the
transfer destination folder name which has been set. If a
file with the same name exists, change the file name or
change the transfer destination folder.
Transfer Destination Folder Settings (Page 6-35)
yyWhen you switched from the [Run] screen to the
[Program] screen, the screen is switched to the [Program]
screen after the transfer of untransferred data has
finished.

If you click the [Cancel] button during the transfer, the

transfer will be forcibly finished and the Error screen will
appear.

A-38

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Status

Remedy
yyChange the trigger cycle of the sensor.
Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-10)
yyConfirm the stress status of the network.

Data which is larger than the remaining

storage of the FTP buffer has been created
and the transfer failed.

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-39

Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)

Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)

The network settings such as the IP address can
be initialized to the factory default by means of the
IP reset switch of the sensor.
yyThe IP reset switch is used when joining the
sensor used in another network to a new network,
or when trouble occurs during connection.
yyDo not initialize a correctly connected sensor.
The connection will be interrupted.

Setting Items

Settings after
initialization

Communication speed

100/10Mbps
Automatically switches

IP Address

BOOTP
(Bootstrap Protocol)
0.0.0.0*1, *2
*2

Subnet Mask

0.0.0.0

Default Gateway

0.0.0.0*2

1 Remove the fixing screw of the front cover

indicated by the

Remove only the fixing screw of the front

cover indicated by the
mark. Do not remove
the front cover.

mark

2 Insert a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in

diameter) into the screw hole and press

the IP reset switch for about 3 seconds.

*1 If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, only the BOOTP

client function can be used.
Do not assign an IP address from the BOOTP
server or DHCP server except the monitor to be
connected.
*2 In the Network Settings screen of the sensor,
[Empty] is displayed.

Network Settings (Page 6-31)

Connecting method after initialization

For direct connection

Connects automatically with BOOTP. There is

no need to set the IP address.
When directly connecting with the sensor
(Page 6-46)

Long and
thin pin

The STATUS indicator light will blink twice

(orange) and then turn off.
The network setting is initialized.

3 Tighten the fixing screw of the front cover.

yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 Nm

For network connection

Search for the sensor to be connected. Search

will be made for a sensor without IP address, set
the IP address by following the instructions on
the screen.
When connecting with the sensor via a
network (Page 6-46)
A-40

mark.

Indicator light

Settings after initialization

IP address setting
method

Initializing the network settings

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Maintenance

Maintenance
Attaching the protection sheet
A protection sheet (OP-87463) can be attached to
protect the LCD panel.

1 Remove the backing film (transparent)

from the back and front sides of the
protection sheet.

Replacing the front cover

The front cover can be replaced with the optional
spare front cover (OP-87461) if it became dirty or
damaged.
Replace the front cover with the correct
procedure by following the precautions
below. Otherwise the enclosure rating (IP67)
may not be maintained.
yyDo not let dust or dirt stick to the O-shaped ring.
yyAttach the O-shaped ring on the correct position.

1 Remove the old front cover and the

O-shaped ring.

O-shaped ring (small)

Backing film
(back)

O-shaped ring (large)

Adhesive side
(back of the protection
sheet)

Protection sheet
Backing film (front)

Front cover
Dedicated screw

2 Apply the protection sheet on the monitor

display with the tab at the lower right.

2 Install the front cover after embedding the

O-shaped ring.

yyScrew: Dedicated screw 2

Use the attached dedicated screw.
yyTightening torque : 0.25 to 0.35 Nm
O-shaped ring (small)

Tab

O-shaped ring (large)

Protection sheet

Apply the protection film while make sure that

no trash tucked in.

Dedicated screw

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Front cover

A-41

Index

Index
Numerics

1. Image Optimization....................................... A-14

1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target).....4-6
2. Master Registration....................................... A-15
2. Master Registration (Registering
an Image as a Reference for Judgment)............4-20
3. Tool Settings.................................................. A-15
3. Tool Settings
(Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-28
4. Output Assignment........................................ A-18
4. Output Assignment
(Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line).....4-60

Achieving adequate image brightness...............5-33

If the brightness cannot be adjusted due to
uneven brightness........................................5-33
If the brightness cannot be adjusted in
the Auto Brightness Adjustment....................5-33
Achieving good focus.........................................5-34
If good focus cannot be achieved by
the Auto Focus Adjustment...........................5-34
Adding a tool......................................................4-31
Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool............................4-31
Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)........5-36
Adjusting the installed distance (WD).................5-32
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-14
Advanced Brightness Adjustment.......................4-18
Advanced Color Extraction/
Advanced Brightness Extraction........................4-49
Advanced Network Settings...............................6-32
Attaching the protection sheet........................... A-41
Auto Brightness Adjustment...............................4-11
Auto Focus Adjustment Position
(auto focus type only).........................................6-42

B
Backing up in a batch.........................................6-19
Backlight.............................................................6-52
Basic adjustments........................... 5-37, 5-38, 5-39
Basic configurations of IV Series..........................1-2
Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4
Basic Operation for the Monitor..........................3-14
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3
Bracket......................................................... 1-9, 8-9
Brightness correction..........................................4-26

A-42

Cables................................................................2-12
Cancelling One-Shot output.................................7-6
Capturing the monitor screen and
saving to the USB memory.................................6-23
Capturing the screen..........................................6-23
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions).....6-8
Changing Over.....................................................7-7
Changing the logging conditions of
the image history................................................6-17
Changing the timing of the status output..............7-6
Checking errors by observing
the PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor....... A-22
Checking the Package Contents..........................1-8
Checking the view and installed distance.............2-2
Clearing Errors...................................................7-10
Clearing the saved images.................................6-16
Color Area/Area tool...........................................4-40
Color Filters (color type only).............................4-19
Communication Cable........................................1-12
Confirming error messages of the monitor........ A-24
Confirming or deleting
the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning....5-25
Confirming/Setting the IP address of
the monitor........................................................ A-36
Confirming/Setting the IP address of
the sensor.......................................................... A-37
Confirming the existence of
the sensor from the monitor.............................. A-35
If the displayed confirmation result is NG.... A-35
Confirming the router settings........................... A-37
Confirming the status by
observing the indicator light of the sensor......... A-32
Confirming the status by observing
the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor........ A-34
Connecting directly.............................................2-16
Connecting method after initialization............... A-40
For direct connection................................... A-40
For network connection............................... A-40
Connecting the monitor and multiple sensors......1-3
Connecting the monitor and single sensor...........1-2
Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable....2-17
Connecting the power cable of the monitor........2-15
Connecting the power I/O cable of the sensor....2-12
Connecting the sensor and monitor...................2-16
Connecting via network......................................2-16
Connection Cable...............................................8-13
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......7-2
Copying a program.............................................6-12
Copy Tool............................................................4-58
Correcting the distorted images due to the
installation..........................................................5-33
Cut-off process of the matching rate................... A-5

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Index

Default value......................................................4-60
Deleting a tool....................................................4-31
Device name......................................................6-29
Device settings...................................................6-29
Digital Zoom (monochrome type only)...............4-19
Dimensions...........................................................8-6
DIN mounting adapter...............................1-11, 8-12
Displaying and outputting the status result.......... A-4
Displaying and outputting the status result at
the time of position adjustment............................ A-4
Displaying from the run screen................. 6-14, 6-18
Displaying from
the Sensor setup menu screen................ 6-14, 6-18
Displaying the histogram....................................5-12
Displaying the Sensor Image History screen.....6-14
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen..........6-7
Displaying the Settings Navigator guide...............4-5
Displaying the statistical information..................5-10
Displaying the USB Memory screen...................6-18
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus....4-66
Display methods for tools.....................................5-7
For color type..................................................5-7
For monochrome type.....................................5-8
Display Settings..................................................6-49
Dome attachment......................................... 1-8, 8-7

E
Editing a program name.....................................6-12
Editing a tool.......................................................4-31
Editing the tool window.......................................3-15
Editing the value with the slider..........................3-14
Enabling the screen capturing function..............6-23
Enlarging the image display.................................5-6
Environmental....................................................6-25
Error Messages................................................. A-22
Ethernet cable....................................................8-13
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45).....................1-12
Exiting the sensor settings and starting an
operation..............................................................5-2
Extended functions for the Image Optimization....4-16
Extended functions for the Master Registration....4-22
Extended functions for the Outline tool..............4-37
Extended functions for the Output Assignment....4-62
Extended functions for
the Position Adjustment tool...............................4-57
Extended functions for the Tool settings.............4-58
Extended functions items for the Output
Assignment.........................................................4-62
Extended functions of the Color Area/Area tool....4-48
External trigger.....................................................7-2

Field Network.....................................................6-37
Finishing by completing all steps..........................4-5
Finishing the Settings Navigator...........................4-5
Finishing without completing the step..................4-5
Fixed Reference Area.........................................4-50
Flow in the Settings Navigator..............................4-2
Flow of the internal process...............................5-40
Focus Adjustment...............................................4-12
Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type......4-12
Focus adjustment for the manual focusing type....4-14
Folder composition and file naming rules...........6-24
For the processing time......................................5-40
Front cover...........................................................8-8
Front cover (for replacement)...............................1-9
FTP.....................................................................6-32
FTP Destination Settings....................................6-33

H
Hanging on the hook............................................2-8
Hiding the histogram..........................................5-13
Hiding the statistical information.........................5-11

I
Imaging Area......................................................4-17
Imaging the target widely...................................5-32
Importing the individual status output of
each detection tool/logic.......................................7-5
Importing the Status Output.................................7-4
Importing the total status output...........................7-4
Infrared polarization filter attachment...................1-8
Initialize Monitor.................................................6-53
Initializing a program..........................................6-13
Initializing the monitor.........................................3-13
Initializing the network settings.......................... A-40
Initializing the Network Settings
(IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-40
Initializing the sensor................................ 3-12, 6-44
Input circuit.........................................................2-14
Input Response Time.........................................7-12
Description for symbols................................7-12
Response time for the error clear input........7-12
Response time for the external master
registration input...........................................7-12
Response time for
the switch program input...............................7-12
Input Settings.....................................................6-26
Inputting characters............................................3-16
Installed distance of the dome attachment...........2-6
Installing/Removing the USB memory................6-18
Installing the sensor at an angle.........................5-35
Installing the USB memory.................................6-18

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-43

Index

Intelligent Monitor.............................. 1-10, 8-4, 8-10

Internal trigger......................................................7-3
I/O Monitor..........................................................6-28
I/O Settings.........................................................6-26
Items of extended functions for the Image
Optimization.......................................................4-16
Items of extended functions for the Master
Registration........................................................4-22
Items of extended functions for
the Tool settings..................................................4-58
IV Series...............................................................1-4

J
Judgment processing flow....................................1-6

L
Language...........................................................6-51
Lighting...............................................................4-18
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light............... A-32
List of the Useful Features...................................6-2
Loading and confirming the saved images.........6-15
Logic Settings.....................................................4-63

M
Main screen for the Image Optimization...............4-7
Main screen for the Master Registration............4-20
Main screen for the Output Assignment.............4-60
Main screen for the Tool Settings.......................4-30
Maintenance...................................................... A-41
Mask settings.....................................................4-45
Master image registration from
the image history in the sensor..........................4-22
Matching rate at the time of protrusion................ A-5
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and
Position Adjustment Tool..................................... A-5
Menu Screen........................................................5-4
Monitor...............................................................1-15
Monitor cable......................................................8-13
Monitor cable (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)..................1-12
Monitor Device Settings.....................................6-45
Monitor Environment..........................................6-45
Monitor Information............................................6-53
Monitor power cable...........................................8-12
Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire)......1-10
Monitor Settings.................................................6-45
Monitor Settings screen....................................... A-9
Mounting adapter......................................... 1-9, 8-8
Mounting the attachment......................................2-6
Mounting the dome attachment............................2-6
Mounting the Monitor............................................2-8
Mounting the mounting adapter............................2-4
Mounting from the jig side...............................2-4
A-44

Mounting on the wall.......................................2-4

Mounting the sensor.............................................2-4
Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2
Mounting the sensor onto the mounting adapter....2-4
Mounting to a panel............................................2-10
Mounting to a wall................................................2-8
Mounting to the DIN rail......................................2-11
Mounting using DIN mounting adapter...............2-11
Mounting with the wall mounting adapter.............2-8

N
Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-13
Name and function of each part of the sensor...1-13
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen......5-4
Network Settings...................................... 6-31, 6-48
No-voltage input
(When the NPN output is selected)....................2-14

O
Operating in the shortest cycle.............................7-3
Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..............5-16
Operation flow when the power is turned on........3-5
Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(Direct Connection)..............................................3-6
Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(Network Connection)...........................................3-7
Operation for initial startup of the sensor...........3-11
Operation of the indicator light...........................1-14
Operations when Power of the Sensor is
Turned on...........................................................7-11
Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5
Optional parts for the monitor................... 1-10, 8-12
Optional parts for the sensor........................ 1-8, 8-7
Other methods of confirming
a network connection........................................ A-35
Outline tool.........................................................4-32
Output circuit......................................................2-14
Output Settings...................................................6-27
Overview of IV Series...........................................1-4
Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2
Overview of the Operation Screen.......................5-3
Overview of the program functions.......................6-8

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Index

P
Panel cutting dimension.....................................2-10
Panel mounting adapter............................1-11, 8-12
Password Lock...................................................6-30
Polarity...............................................................6-28
Polarized visible light filter attachment.................1-8
Polarizing filter attachment...................................8-8
Position Adjustment tool.....................................4-51
Power I/O cable....................................................8-8
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire)...........1-9
Preparation flow...................................................6-9
Preparation procedures........................................6-9
Preparing the program functions..........................6-9
Processing during an operation..........................5-36
Program..............................................................6-25
Program Switch Method.....................................6-42
Protection sheet....................................... 1-10, 8-12

R
Reducing the effect of illumination variation.......5-36
Reducing the image blur....................................5-34
Reducing the shininess of
the glossy or metal surface................................5-35
Registering from the image in
the USB memory................................................4-24
When using batch backup files (*.iva)...........4-24
When using image capture files (*.ivp).........4-25
Registering the images from
the file saved in the USB memory......................5-22
Registering the images from
the image history saved in the sensor................5-20
Registering the images taken in the Test mode....5-18
Registering the master image............................4-21
Registering the Master Image..............................7-8
Registering the OK/NG images to be used for
the Tool Auto Tuning...........................................5-18
Remedy when connection via a network is
unavailable........................................................ A-29
Remedy when direct connection is unavailable.... A-28
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be
Connected with the Sensor............................... A-28
Removing the USB memory...............................6-18
Replacing the front cover.................................. A-41
Rotate 180........................................................6-40
Rotation Range........................................ 4-38, 4-57
RUN screen (menu display OFF)........................ A-6
RUN screen (menu display ON).......................... A-6

S
Saving the image history individually.................6-20
Saving the Sensor Settings or
Images to the USB Memory...............................6-18

Saving the sensor settings or

the image history................................................6-19
Search Algorithm................................................4-38
Searching for a sensor to be connected...............3-8
Selecting a display method for tools.....................5-7
Selecting a tool according to
its intended purpose...........................................4-28
Selecting the file in the USB memory.................3-17
Selecting the tool................................................5-41
Selecting the tool by tapping it on the monitor.....5-6
Selecting the tool from the pull-down menu.........5-6
Selecting the tool whose
information to be displayed..................................5-6
Sensor..........................................1-8, 1-13, 8-2, 8-6
Sensor Advanced screen.................................. A-11
Sensor advanced settings..................................6-25
Sensor Connect........................................ 6-45, 6-46
When connecting with
the sensor via a network...............................6-46
When directly connecting with the sensor....6-46
Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG)...............................6-14
Sensor Information.............................................6-43
Sensor Setup Menu screen................................. A-7
Sensor Setup screen......................................... A-14
Setting a search region............................ 4-35, 4-55
Setting a sensitivity................................... 4-36, 4-56
Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool..........4-40
Setting items for the Outline tool........................4-32
Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool....4-52
Setting range of the Output Assignment.............4-60
Settings after initialization.................................. A-40
Settings for disabling outlines................... 4-35, 4-55
Settings for the Trigger Options............................4-8
Settings List......................................................... A-6
Settings Navigator................................................4-2
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow......4-4
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information.........6-45
Setting the Color Area/Area tool.........................4-42
Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor....6-25
Setting the Image Optimization............................4-6
Setting the network address of the monitor..........3-7
Setting the Outline tool.......................................4-33
Setting the Output Assignment...........................4-61
Setting the Position Adjustment tool...................4-53
Setting the Trigger Options......................... 4-8, 4-10
Setting the upper limit.........................................4-46
Setting to the Factory Default.............................3-12
Setup Adjustment...............................................6-25
Shortening the imaging processing time............5-41
Shortening the Processing Time........................5-40
Shortening the processing time of each tool......5-41
Shortening the processing time of
the Color Area/Area tool.....................................5-42

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-45

Index

Shortening the processing time of

the Outline tool...................................................5-41
Shortening the processing time of
the position adjustment......................................5-42
Specification of I/O circuit and
current of the sensor..........................................2-14
Specifications.......................................................8-2
Specifying sensor to be connected by
IP address..........................................................3-10
Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned target
position...............................................................5-36
Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool....................5-39
If the area search becomes unstable due to
unwanted colors being extracted..................5-39
If the color to be judged cannot be detected....5-39
Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-32
Stabilizing the judgment process by
taking a clear image of the target.......................5-32
Stabilizing the Outline tool..................................5-38
If the detection becomes unstable due to
the effect of the unwanted outline
other than the target.....................................5-38
If the match rate difference between
the high and low-quality-targets is small.......5-39
If the outline cannot be detected
when the target becomes out of position......5-38
If the outline of the target cannot be
detected........................................................5-39
If the target tilts and the outline cannot be
detected........................................................5-39
Stabilizing the position adjustment.....................5-37
If the outline of the reference target
cannot be detected.......................................5-38
If the position adjustment becomes
unstable due to the effect of
the unwanted outlines...................................5-37
If the target tilts and the position
adjustment becomes unstable......................5-37
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning........5-16
Starting an Operation...........................................5-2
Starting the Settings Navigator.............................4-3
STATUS indicator light....................................... A-33
Status table......................................................... A-2
Stylus........................................................ 1-10, 8-12
Switching the display to the full-screen mode......5-5
System..................................................... 6-25, 6-45
System Configuration...........................................1-2

T
Things can be performed with the program
functions...............................................................6-8
Tilt Correction.....................................................6-38
Time....................................................................6-51
A-46

Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically

Adjusting the Judgment Condition)....................5-15
Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration
information..........................................................5-26
Tool name................................................. 4-39, 4-49
Tool settings.......................................................5-36
Total Status Conditions.......................................4-65
Touch Panel Calibration.....................................6-52
Touch Screen Lock.............................................6-50
Transfer Condition Settings................................6-34
Transfer Destination Folder Settings..................6-35
Transferring the settings backed up in the USB
memory to the sensor.........................................6-21
Trigger number...................................................5-10
Troubleshooting................................................. A-19
Turning on the power and starting an operation....5-2
Types of tools.....................................................4-28

U
Unmounting from the DIN mounting adapter......2-11
Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter........2-9
Unmounting the sensor........................................2-5
Update Monitor...................................................6-53
Updating the sensor...........................................6-44
USB memory (1GB)............................................1-10
Useful features during installation/adjustment......6-4
Useful features while running...............................6-2
Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment...............5-35
Using the digital zooming function......................5-32
Using the dome attachment....................... 2-6, 5-35
Using the image files saved in
the USB memory................................................5-15
Using the image history saved in the sensor......5-15
Using the images taken in the Test mode...........5-15
Using the polarizing filter attachment......... 2-7, 5-35
Using the program functions (changing over)....6-10
When the [External IN] is selected in the
Program Switch Method...............................6-11
When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in
the Program Switch Method.........................6-10
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)...........1-4
Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)......................1-5

V
Voltage input
(When the PNP output is selected)....................2-14

W
Wall mounting adapter...............................1-11, 8-12
When the NPN output is selected......................2-14
When the PNP output is selected.......................2-14
White Balance (for color type only)....................6-41

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Index

MEMO

- IV Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

A-47

Revision history
Revision history Edition number

Revision details

January, 2012

1st edition

May, 2012

2nd edition

Addition of screw hole (1/4-20UNC) to the mounting adapter.

Revision for German / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional).
Revision for Tool Auto Tuning by registration information file.

August, 2012

3rd edition

Corresponds to the simulator function of the IV-Navigator.

December, 2012

4th edition

Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean.

Addition of Logic output / Total Status NG output / RUN output.
Addition of the FTP client function.
Compatibility with field networks (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET).

December, 2013

5th edition

Ethernet and Monitor cable changed

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models
or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to
represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products
found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered
to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole
option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be
defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but
not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture,
vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only
(2) 
suggestions, and it is Buyers responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyers intended
use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) 
The Products and any samples (Products/Samples) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in
humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications
state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way,
KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE
harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH
NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY
RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED
ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS,
THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES,
OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED
OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTYS CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST
BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may
not apply.
BUYERS TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:
If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must
provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets
and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.

E 1101-3

Copyright (c) 2012 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 244002E 1123-5 206GB Printed in Japan